Home

Toshiba 5520c All in One Printer User Manual

1. After setting the value copy and check the image quality If further image quality adjustment is necessary go to the next step e STUDIO5520C 6520C 6530C 2008 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved 2 71 2 Copier specific Adjustments HI D 2 Enter the adjustment mode 05 Change the values for codes 7025 7064 to 7065 or 7675 to adjust the reproducibility of the background when using the RADF Acceptabl Color mode 05 code Recommended value e value Default range Black 05 7025 Set a value smaller than 128 ACS Black 05 7675 to increase the density level Full Color 05 7764 of the background Monocolor 05 7765 0 to 255 Set a value larger than 128 to Twin Color 05 7766 decrease the density level of the background Set the value in increments of approximately 20 while checking the copy image until the optimum value is obtained Q Caution after the adjustment Correctly adjusting the installation heights of the MFP and the RADF is a prerequisite to perform this adjustment Therefore perform all the necessary adjustments Only if further adjustment is still desired for the reproducibility of background should this adjustment be performed e STUDIO5520C 6520C 6530C 2008 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved 2 72 2 Copier specific Adjustments 2 18 To Program Frequently Used Copy Settings To Use Custom Mode Q Explana
2. Value automatically set 40 Value automatically set 20 Value automatically set 10 Value automatically set Value automatically set 10 Default Value automatically set Value automatically set Ol OAD Nn BR WL NR Value automatically set Value automatically set e Decreasing the value will make the solid colored area become lighter decrease the amount of toner on the solid colored area On the other hand increasing the value will make the solid colored area become darker increase the amount of toner on the area b Enter adjustment mode 05 select code 396 and then press the START button After the image quality control is finished perform printing to check the image quality of the solid colored area The changed setting values for 08 2514 2515 2546 will be effective for the image printed immediately after the change When these values are changed performing image quality control with 05 396 is recommended Repeat procedures a to b as required in order to change the setting value so that the solid colored area becomes your desired density Since the density of a gradation area halftone such as a photograph is adjusted as well as that of a solid colored image follow the procedure below IB 2 Perform automatic calibration for each type of paper whose density has been adjusted by means of the follo
3. e STUDIO5520C 6520C 6530C 2008 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved 3 15 3 Printer specific Adjustments For Macintosh Mac This adjustment will have an effect only on full color printing Open the print dialog box Select Photograph from among the Image Type options The menu to select varies according to the operating system Refer to the table below and select the menu OS Menu 10 2 x Printer Features gt Feature Sets Color settings 2 gt Image Type 10 3 x 10 4 x 10 5x Color Settings 1 gt Image Type Printer TOSHIBA e STUDIO6530C ie e Presets Standard 1 Color Settings 1 Color Type Color E Z Resolution 600 dpi Halftone Auto HH M Distinguish Thin Lines f Toner Save Image Type Photo Black Over Print Text and Graphics 4 Pure Black and Gray Black and Gray Auto MW o PDFv Preview Cancel C Print Q Caution after the adjustment Nothing in particular Remarks Setting a color space to sRGB is a prerequisite to maximize the effectiveness of this adjustment Therefore if the monitor does not support sRGB or if color management cannot be performed the effectiveness of the adjustment may be significantly lost In general it is impossible to reproduce color saturation closely matching the true colors as viewed on the mo
4. 4 6 ToFinely Print the Image Stored in the e Filing box To print images stored through Copy to Box or Print to Box 4 7 To Store an Image Suitable for Displaying on the Monitor or Image Editing 4 8 To Finely Print Color Images Scanned and Stored To print images stored through Scan to Box AO PRODEMCIK M n 5 Scanning specific Adjustments 5 1 To Clearly Scan Text To reduce noise around text 5 2 To Scan an Original while Eliminating the Background Color To eliminate the background density 5 3 To Clearly Scan and Print an Original in Black and White To improve gradation and reduce graininess e STUDIO5520C 6520C 6530C 2008 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved Table of Contents 5 4 5 5 5 6 5 7 5 8 To Scan the Original while Reducing the File Size sssssse 5 7 5 4 1 To Reduce the File Size by Changing the Options when Scanning the Original 5 8 5 4 2 To Reduce the File Size in Slim PDF iii 5 11 To Sharply Scan the Original To increase the sharpness intensity 5 13 To Scan an Original while Enhancing Black 5 15 To Scan an Original with the Desired Gradation 5 17 To Register the Original Mode Optimal for a Particular Type
5. Low quality Q Caution after the adjustment The table below shows you the correlation between the adjustment and file size The ratio of the file size may vary depending on the type of original Therefore use the table below just for your reference Correlation between the resolution and the file size procedure 1 The file size in a resolution of 200 dpi is 100 Resolution File size ratio 200 dpi 100 150 dpi Approx 60 100 dpi Approx 30 Correlation between the original mode and the file size procedure 2 The file size in the Photo mode is 100 Original mode File size ratio Photo 100 Text Approx 20 Correlation between the compression rate and the file size procedure 3 The file size is 100 with MID selected Compression rate File size ratio MID 100 HIGH Approx 80 e STUDIO5520C 6520C 6530C 2008 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved 5 9 5 Scanning specific Adjustments The adjustment may possibly diminish the image quality as shown by the table below Therefore carefully perform the adjustment while checking the scanned in image Procedures used Possible image degradation Any of procedures from 1 to 4 The photo image area may be blurred 1 or 3 Noise may be increase around text 1 or 3 Small sized text may become illegible 4 Light colored images may not be clearly scanned
6. 3 27 To Easily Adjust the Overall Contrast 3 31 To Obtain a Sharper Print Image nonet nennen nenatis 3 34 To Obtain a Softer Image veces m 3 37 To Make Low resolution Data Look Finer To soften an image 3 40 To Eliminate Smudges from Highly Colored Text and Lines To prevent toner scattering around text and lines where a large amount of oy NOS e 3 43 To Clearly Print Light Colored Thin Lines or Text 3 47 3 14 1 To Adjust the Print Image Quality in the Color Mode 3 48 3 14 2 To Adjust the Print Image Quality in the Black and White Mode 3 56 To Make the Light Colored Area Darker on the Printout 3 60 To Clearly Print Thin Lines Double Lines ss 3 66 To Decrease the Image Density and Save Toner To Print in the Toner Save Mode 3 71 To Adjust the Image Density in the Toner Save Mode 3 74 To Print Illegible Gray or Colored Text in Black 3 77 e STUDIO5520C 6520C 6530C 2008 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved Table of Contents 3 20 To Ignore Blank Pages for Printing 3 79 3 21 To Sharply Print Black Text ice ne ass epa koe epos epi ete ep atn ep iun 3 82 3 22 To Prevent Dark
7. Q Remarks Use the following steps to change the default resolution original mode compression rate and or background adjustment options a Press the USER FUNCTIONS button on the Control Panel to enter the User Functions menu b Press the USER tab c Press the SCAN button d Press the Next button several times to display the screen to change the default value in the desired Color mode e In the RESOLUTION ORIGINAL MODE COMPRESS and or BACKGROUND ADJUSTMENT option press the desired button to change the default The default resolution can be selected on a color mode basis Full color mode including the Auto color mode Gray scale mode and Black mode The following resolution options are available as the default Full color mode including Auto color mode 600 400 300 200 150 100 dpi Gray scale mode 600 400 300 200 150 100 dpi Black mode 600 400 300 200 150 100 dpi Remember that when scanning the original in the Full color mode if the original mode option is switched from the Photo mode or the Printed image to the Text mode the file size may become larger e STUDIO5520C 6520C 6530C 2008 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved 5 10 5 Scanning specific Adjustments 5 4 2 To Reduce the File Size in Slim PDF Both the service technician and the user can use procedure 1 The service technician must use only procedure 2 in adjustment mode 05
8. Q Explanation When a double sided original printed on thin paper such as a brochure and leaflet is copied the images seen through the back of the page are also copied Perform background adjustment in order to avoid this problem e STUDIO5520C 6520C 6530C 2008 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved 2 31 2 Copier specific Adjustments Q Procedures The procedure to use varies depending on whether to adjust the copy image quality in the Black mode or the Full color mode Refer to the procedure corresponding to the user s particular request Refer to the procedure to adjust the copy image quality in the Full color mode with the Printed image mode selected in order to adjust the copy image quality in the Black mode with the Photo mode selected The value adjusted is shared in the Black mode with the Photo mode selected and in the Full color mode with the Printed image mode selected Therefore adjusting the copy image quality in either of the modes affects that in the other mode 2 7 1 To Adjust the Copy Image Quality in the Black Mode You can start with any of the procedures But it is recommended to perform the procedures in order as listed below You can use one procedure in conjunction with another But if this changes the image quality more than required or loses the effectiveness of the adjustment restore the settings made in the previously used procedure to the original ones Then use other procedures
9. selected to allow the user to operate it Refer to the MFP Management Guide for further information regarding how to select the CALIBRATION DISPLAY LEVEL option Perform each adjustment for 600dpi and 1200dpi Use steps a through j to perform the automatic calibration a Press the USER FUNCTIONS button on the Control Panel to enter the User Functions menu b Press the ADMIN tab c Enter an administrator password of 6 to 10 digits Press the OK button d Press the GENERAL button e Press the CALIBRATION button f Press the 600dpi PRINT or 1200dpi PRINT button g Press the CALIBRATION button to print out the test chart h Place the printed test chart on the original glass 1 Press the START button to perform calibration When the calibration comes to an end the message Scanning and calibrating will disappear j The message Is a result made to reflect will appear Press the YES button Q Caution after the adjustment When image quality control is repeatedly performed the color balance may slightly vary due to an error even in the same environment e STUDIO5520C 6520C 6530C 2008 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved 3 3 3 Printer specific Adjustments 3 2 To Maintain a Steady Color Balance on Thick Paper or Special Paper Before the adjustment After the adjustment The color balance varies according to the The color balance is constantly maintained on paper t
10. 0 to 4 05 8404 Background processing offset adjustment Automatic density adjustment 05 8409 Background processing offset adjustment Manual density adjustment 0 to 255 05 8334 Range correction adjustment Automatic density adjustment 05 8365 Range correction adjustment Manual density adjustment 05 8370 Background adjustment 05 8371 Fine adjustment of black density 05 8372 RGB conversion method selection 05 8373 Full color Saturation adjustment 05 8375 Sharpness adjustment 05 8380 Manual density adjustment center value 05 8381 Manual density adjustment light step value 05 8382 Manual density adjustment dark step value 05 8389 Background processing offset adjustment Automatic density adjustment 05 8394 Background processing offset adjustment Manual density adjustment 0 to 255 For further information regarding the codes refer to the Service Manual Service Handbook lt Note gt Custom mode Never adjust any values for 05 code in existing original mode After adjusting the value in the Custom mode use the next procedure e STUDIO5520C 6520C 6530C Select the code for the Custom mode option in order to adjust the value for 05 code in the 2008 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved 5 20 KU 3 When scanning the original press the COMMON SETTING button on the Contro
11. P 7 2 4 ie NI z E z n a a dd 3 3 3 3 35 asamuuuuuae The light colored area becomes darker but the Only the light colored area becomes darker highly colored area becomes blurred Q Explanation When the entire image is printed darker to make the light colored area darker the highly colored area may become much darker and blurred Change the options on the printer driver or adjust the color balance in order to make only the light colored area darker while leaving the highly colored area as it 1s e STUDIO5520C 6520C 6530C 2008 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved 3 60 3 Printer specific Adjustments Q Procedures Perform the adjustment in accordance with the procedures below Both the service technician and the user can use procedure 1 Only the service technician must use procedures 2 and 3 The item to set varies depending on the type of data to adjust Select an effective option according to the data format to adjust such as a print image raster data text font and line drawing graphic data For Windows M 1 Open the property page of the printer driver and press Setting button in the Image Quality tab Set the This adjustment will have an effect only on Auto or Color mode printing Background adjustment option in the Image Attribute tab within the range of 1 to 4 Setting Basic Color Balance Ima
12. The adjustment may possibly decrease the density of G Green B Blue and K Black extremely Therefore carefully perform the adjustment while checking the copy image Unless this adjustment changes the density of R Red return the values to the default set value 5 This adjustment may affect not only the copy image but also every image quality such as the printout Therefore perform the adjustment being aware that the image quality of all future printouts will be changed when printing out originals other than the one that is used for the adjustment Q Caution after the adjustment The adjustment may possibly cause offset failure particularly when the highly colored original is copied in the Photo mode Therefore carefully perform the adjustment while checking the copy image U Remarks Enter a value within the recommended value range mentioned in the procedures Otherwise it may cause a loss in MFP performance including degradation in the image quality and a reduction in the life of the consumables e STUDIO5520C 6520C 6530C 2008 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved 2 21 2 Copier specific Adjustments 2 5 To Make the Pale Area of the Original Look Darker and Sharper To improve the highlight reproducibility Before the adjustment After the adjustment The splashing area highlight is blurred A clear copy image of the splashing area is obtained Q Explanation Perform the copy density
13. the IMAGE menu is set to the center Remember that 1 step of the indicator will increase or decrease the sharpness intensity by 25 If the sharpness intensity of the center value is changed each step of the indicator will be changed accordingly For instance if the center value is decreased by 25 softer the value of each step of the indicator will also be decreased by 25 softer However the range of adjustment values that is valid for sharpness level change is from 100 to 100 of the total of the setting value of the adjustment code and that of the indicator For instance if the setting value of the adjustment code is 103 25 from the default value the limit of the steps in the soft side of the indicator is 3 If the step is set at 4 the image quality will not be changed e STUDIO5520C 6520C 6530C 2 39 2008 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved 2 Copier specific Adjustments 4 3 2 1 0 2 3 4 Soft Sharp Assigned adjustment value of sharpness Default 100 75 50 25 0 25 50 75 100 Setting value 103 109 100 75 50 25 0 25 50 75 Since 25 is assigned to the center the image quality remains the same even if the indicator is changed from 3 to 4 lt Note gt Minimizing moir and Sharpening the copy image are mutually contradictory When the adjustment is performed to m
14. Both the service technician and the user can use procedure 1 and 2 Only the service technician must use procedures 3 to 5 1 Press the IMAGE button on the Control Panel Press the BACKGROUND ADJUSTMENT button Press the LIGHT button to decrease the background density After decreasing the background density copy and check the image quality With the background density set to the minimum if further image quality adjustments are still necessary the service technician must use the next procedure 2 Press the BASIC button on the Control Panel Press the button to decrease the copy density Move the copy density indicator to the side for 1 or 2 steps The images seen through the back of the page will no longer be copied But remember that text will also be lightly copied depending on the type of original After decreasing the copy density copy and check the copy image quality With the copy density set to the minimum if the images seen through the back of the page are still copied or if you would like to prevent this problem without changing the copy density of text use the next procedure e STUDIO5520C 6520C 6530C 2008 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved 2 32 2 Copier specific Adjustments M 3 Enter adjustment mode 05 Change the values for codes 7033 7034 7041 to 7044 7048 and 7049 to adjust the density level of the background Recommended Default
15. Cancel Print This adjustment will be effective only if a file created on a general application such as Microsoft Office is printed in PostScript PS3 XPS and Macintosh It may not be effective if a file created on a graphic application e g Illustrator or a DTP application e g QuarkXPress is printed or a PDF file created on these applications is printed using the C M Y and K toners Unmark the Use PostScript Passthrough checkbox in the PostScript Setting options in the Others tab The Image Quality Type option will be effective if printing on Windows PS3 is performed but not on Macintosh or if a file created on the above applications 1s printed However the color balance may be changed and also the image quality may be diminished depending on the type of file e STUDIO5520C 6520C 6530C 2008 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved 3 8 3 Printer specific Adjustments The Image Quality Type options feature the following General General is the best rounded option to offer fine printouts of any type of original including text photographs and graphics It is suitable for printing using word processing and spreadsheet software If General is selected Smooth which is intended to improve the reproducibility of gradations will be applied to graphics and images while Detail which is intended to improve the resolving power will be applied to text from among the Halftone options s
16. Original mode 05 code Text Photo 05 7286 Text 05 7287 Explanation for setting values Setting Range correction value operation 0 Fixed 1 Varied Q Caution after the adjustment The adjustment may possibly cause text handwritten with a pencil or light text to become illegible on the copy Therefore carefully perform the adjustment while checking the copy image Q Remarks Enter a value within the recommended value range mentioned in the procedures Otherwise it may cause a loss in MFP performance including degradation in the image quality e STUDIO5520C 6520C 6530C 2008 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved 2 27 2 Copier specific Adjustments 2 6 2 To Adjust the Copy Image Quality in the Full Color Mode You can start with any of the procedures But it is recommended to perform the procedures in order as listed below You can use one procedure in conjunction with another But if this changes the image quality more than required or loses the effectiveness of the adjustment restore the settings made in the previously used procedure to the original ones Then use other procedures Both the service technician and the user can use procedures 1 and 4 Only the service technician must use procedures 2 and 3 IB P 1 Press the AUTO button on the Control Panel to select the automatic density adjustment IB 2 Press the IMAGE button on the Control Panel Press the
17. Print_ After changing the option on the printer driver print and check the print image quality Only if the saturation of R Red is still insufficient even after all the above procedures have been used must the service technician use the next procedure e STUDIO5520C 6520C 6530C 2008 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved 3 29 3 Printer specific Adjustments I D 5 Enter adjustment mode 05 Change the value for code 2905 to adjust the transfer 1st transfer roller bias output Adjust the offset voltage of the transfer roller bias for C Cyan and K Black so as to increase the density of R Red The code to use varies depending on the paper type and color to adjust Adjust the value for the subcode corresponding to the color for which you would like to improve the image quality Set the value within a range of 2 to 5 to obtain the highest density of R Red Color to adjust C Cyan K Black C Cyan K Black Recommended Acceptable Default value value range Paper type 05 code Subcode Plain paper 05 2905 2to5 0 to 10 Thick Never change the values for subcodes other than the above Otherwise it may cause a loss in MFP performance including degradation in the image quality Note The adjustment may possibly decrease the density of G Green B Blue and K Black extremely Therefore carefully perform the
18. button on the Control Panel Change the Image Rotation option to turn the original After changing the Image Rotation option scan the original and check the scanned in image quality If further image quality adjustments are still necessary the service technician must use the next procedure e STUDIO5520C 6520C 6530C 2008 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved 5 11 5 Scanning specific Adjustments b Enter adjustment mode 05 Change the values for code 9104 and 9107 to adjust the image quality and resolution of a background 05 code Recommended value 05 9104 5 05 9107 1 or 2 193 Acceptable value range Default Changing the value provides the effects below Enter the value within the recommended value range Otherwise it may cause a loss in MFP performance including degradation in the image quality Set a smaller value High compression small file size low image quality and high scanning speed Set a later value Low compression large file size high image quality and low scanning speed To leave the color of text as it is Use steps a to b to perform the adjustment a Turn the original and place it Or when scanning the original press the COMMON SETTING button on the Control Panel Change the Image Rotation option to turn the original After changing the Image Rotation option scan the original and check the scanned in image quality If further image quality
19. color mode or the Gray scale mode M P 1 Select HIGH from among the compression rate options MID is selected from among the compression rate options by default The procedure to use varies depending on whether to select the compression rate on a job by job basis without utilizing the template utilize the template or change the default compression rate Refer to To select the compression rate on a job by job basis in order to store an image at a high compression rate for a particular job Refer to To utilize the template in order to select an appropriate compression rate corresponding to the type of original to store and the purpose of the image stored Refer to To change the default compression rate in order to have HIGH selected from among the compression rate options by default To select the compression rate on a job by job basis without utilizing the template When scanning the original press the COMMON SETTING button on the Control Panel Select HIGH from among the COMPRESS options To utilize the template Recall the template where HIGH is selected from among the compression rate options and scan the original The user may want to select a compression rate depending on the type of original or purpose of the image stored In this case it is recommended to utilize the template Initially select the desired compression rate in the template and recall it as necessary This facilitates changing th
20. 0 1 2 Ala Detail 05 8048 0 1 2 Smooth 05 8061 0 1 2 Detail 05 8065 0 1 2 PS3 Smooth 05 8053 0 1 2 K 600dpi Detail 05 8057 0 1 2 Black PS3 Smooth 05 8271 0 1 2 1200dpi Detail 05 8275 0 1 2 XPS Smooth 05 8045 0 1 2 Detail 05 8049 0 1 2 PCL5c PCL5c Set a value larger than 128 0 to 255 PCL5c PCL5c Set the value in increments of approximately 20 while checking the printouts until the optimum value is obtained e STUDIO5520C 6520C 6530C 2008 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved 3 12 3 Printer specific Adjustments Halftone refers to how halftones are printed Two options are available Smooth which is intended to improve the reproducibility of gradation and Detail which is intended to print halftones in details with the high frequency The halftone option to be applied in printing can be selected from among the Halftone options on the printer driver Windows or in the print dialog box Macintosh Auto 1s selected from among the Apply to options by default It is intended to automatically select Smooth or Detail in accordance with Apply to of the halftone option the selected Color and Image Quality Type options as described in the table below Apply to Color and Image Quality Type o
21. 05 Change the value for the code 7795 to adjust the default value for the sharpness intensity Accepta Recommended ble value range value Color mode Original mode 05 code Default Set a value larger Full color User custom 05 7795 than 128 0 to 255 129 to 228 Note Ifthe setting value is too large Moir may appear e STUDIO5520C 6520C 6530C 2008 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved 2 79 2 Copier specific Adjustments To copy text or photos more clearly This adjustment is effective when you want image quality emphasizing text or photos a Enter the adjustment mode 05 Change the value of the code 7841 to adjust the reproducibility of the Text Photo mode Color mode Original mode 05 code Recommended value Default Set 1 or 2 to emphasize photos Full color User custom 05 7841 Set 4 or 5 to emphasize text Explanation for setting values Setting Reproducibility value level Default Photo oriented 2 Characteristics The reproducibility level of photos on printed images is higher than that of Photo oriented 1 The reproducibility level of photos on printed images is higher than that of default Photo oriented 1 Equivalent to default The reproducibility level of text on printed images is higher than that of default The reproducibility level of text on printed images is higher than that of Text o
22. 3 14 1 To Adjust the Print Image Quality in the Color Mode Perform the adjustment in accordance with the procedures below Both the service technician and the user can use procedures 1 2 and 3 Only the service technician must use procedures 4 and 5 Ul 1 Change the Image Quality Type and Halftone options For Windows 3m Open the property page of the printer driver Change the Image Quality Type and Halftone options in This adjustment will have an effect only on Auto or Color mode printing the Image Quality tab Set either of the following options in accordance with the type of original to print Image Quality Type Presentation To make color darker Halftone Detail To make the halftone screen high frequency TOSHIBA e STUDIO6530CSeries PS3 Printing Preferences n Basic Finishing Paper Handling Image Quality Effect Others Setting Print Job Normal Print zJ Basic Color Balance Image Attribute Image Quality Type Custom Color Settings Profile Name r 4 General Photograph E Halftone gus Resolution pe Bl te 88 uns LS LS b Advanced T Use Black for All Text Distinguish Thin Lines Presentation Graphics L FN Pure Black Apply to Profile None F Pure Gray Auto CLLLECELLELLELLELLCA v Save Profle Seting I P CELLES Restore Defaults Apply to FN Black Over Print Text
23. 8210 to 8212 and 8249 to 8254 to adjust the judgmental threshold for the Pure Black and Gray setting Original 05 code Subcode Recommended Acceptable Default mode value value range Text 8252 0 1 2 3 4 Default 1 to 255 8 8 8 8 8 Graphics 8253 0 1 2 3 4 Default 1 to 255 1 1 1 8 1 Image 8254 0 1 2 3 4 Default 1 to 255 1 1 1 8 1 Text 8210 0 1 2 3 Default 1 to 255 8 8 8 8 Graphics 8211 0 1 2 3 Default 1 to 255 1 1 1 8 Image 8212 0 1 2 3 Default 1 to 255 1 1 1 8 Text 8249 0 1 2 3 4 Default 1 to 255 8 8 8 8 8 Graphics 8250 0 1 2 3 4 Default 1 to 255 1 1 1 8 1 Image 8251 0 1 2 3 4 Default 1 to 255 1 1 1 8 1 Subcode Image Quality Type 0 General Photograph Presentation Line Art Advanced f the default value is 1 change the Pure Black and Gray setting to Off on the Color Settings menu of printer driver since no value smaller than 1 is provided When Text Graphic amp Image is selected for the Apply to setting on the printer driver setting menu photo areas whose colors are close to black may be treated as black because the larger the value is the wider the area to be printed only with K toner becomes Therefore adjust the value carefully while checking the copied image e STUDIO5520C 6520C 6530C 2008 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved 3 23 3 Printer specific Adjustments 3 7 To Easily Adjust the Overall Brightness Before the adju
24. Adjustment Original mode 05 code Recommended value Text Photo 05 1688 Automatic offsetting Text 05 1689 adjustment for Printed image 05 1690 background processing Photo 05 1691 Map 05 1692 Text Photo 05 1698 Manual offsetting Text 05 1699 adjustment for Printed image 05 1700 background processing Photo 05 1701 Map 05 1702 Text Photo 05 7759 Twin color copy Text 05 7760 Printed image 05 7761 Set a value larger than 128 to increase the density The value for automatic offsetting adjustment for background processing will be applied only if the automatic copy density mode is selected On the other hand the value for manual offsetting adjustment for background processing will be applied only if the manual copy density mode is selected Set the value in increments of approximately 10 while checking the copy image until the optimum value is obtained The value for the code corresponding to the original mode Text Photo Text or Printed image will affect the copy image quality in the Full color mode and the Auto color mode Note Making the highlighted area more visible or increasing the background density and eliminating the background color or decreasing the background density are mutually contradictory If the background color is darkened to make the highlighted area more visible the hue of the background may change After adjusting th
25. Area where the density is adjusted Low density area Medium density area High density area Note This adjustment changes the values set in the MFP Therefore it will affect every user who uses the printer by connecting it to the MFP After the adjustment the values changed will be applied to all printouts for the Halftone option For instance if the value for 05 code for PCL and Detail is changed it will be applied to printing performed with PCL6 and Halftone Detail or Auto selected Carefully perform the adjustment being aware that the image quality of all future printouts will be changed when printing out originals other than the one that is used for the adjustment When Mono is selected from among the Color options and Auto default 1s selected from among the Halftone options Detail of the Halftone options is applied to text and graphics illustrations and Smooth is applied to raster data images Therefore particular attention is required since the adjustment may have a different impact according to the patterns of the image to be printed After increasing the density print and check the print image quality If further image quality adjustments are still necessary use the next procedure e STUDIO5520C 6520C 6530C 3 58 2008 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved 3 Printer specific Adjustments Pss ED This adjustment will have an ef
26. BACKGROUND ADJUSTMENT button Press the LIGHT button to decrease the background density After decreasing the background density copy and check the image quality With the background density set to the minimum 1f further image quality adjustments are still necessary the service technician must use the next procedure IB P 3 Enter adjustment mode 05 Change the values for codes 1688 to 1692 and 1698 to 1702 to adjust the background density Acceptable value range Adjustment Original mode 05 code Recommended value Text Photo 05 1688 Automatic offsetting Text 05 1689 adjustment for Printed image 05 1690 background processing Photo 05 1691 Map 05 1692 Text Photo 05 1698 Manual offsetting Text 05 1699 adjustment for Printed image 05 1700 background processing Photo 05 1701 Map 05 1702 The value for automatic offsetting adjustment for background processing will be applied only if the Set a value smaller than 128 0 to 255 automatic copy density mode is selected On the other hand the value for manual offsetting adjustment for background processing will be applied only if the manual copy density mode is selected Set the value in increments of approximately 10 while checking the copy image until the optimum value is obtained The value for the code corresponding to the original mode Text Photo Text or Printed image will affect the copy image qualit
27. Check the life of the consumables particularly the drum and transfer belt unit and replace them if necessary When replacing any consumable use steps a to b a Enter the PM support mode Reset the counter corresponding to the replaced consumable to 0 For further information regarding the PM support mode refer to the Service Manual Be sure to reset the counter Otherwise it may cause a loss in performance including degradation in the image quality and a reduction in the life of the consumables b Perform automatic calibration Be sure to perform automatic calibration not only with the paper types adjusted in step 1 and 2 but also all paper types Refer to the following table for adjustment MFP mode How to perform automatic calibration Perform step 1 referring to To Obtain a Good Color Balance on Thick Paper Perform step 2 if required Copy Print 600dpi Perform step 2 referring to To Maintain a Steady Color Balance on Print Thick Paper or Special Paper 1200dpi After replacing any consumable remember to reset the counter corresponding to it to 0 Otherwise it may cause a loss in MFP performance including degradation in the image quality and a reduction in the life of the consumables While replacing any consumable also check the slit glass in the laser optical unit and thoroughly clean it if it is soiled e STUDIO5520C 6520C 6530C 2008 TOSHIBA TEC CORPO
28. Enable the Distinguish Thin Line option on the printer driver For Windows PcLe Ps3 xps Open the property page of the printer driver Press the Setting button in the Image Quality tab Mark the Distinguish Thin Line checkbox in the Basic tab Setting Basic Color Balance Image Attribute Custom Color Settings Save Current Settinas as Name Setting 1 Original Image Quality Type Gener al Y Halftone Resolution Auto gt 600dpi Use Black for All Text IV Pure Black Apply to JV Pure Gray Auto v Apply to IV Black Over Print Text amp Graphic Restore Defaults DK Cancel Help cme Heb e STUDIO5520C 6520C 6530C 2008 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved 3 67 3 Printer specific Adjustments For Macintosh Mac Open the print dialog box Enable the Distinguish Thin Line option The menu to select varies according to the operating system Refer to the table below and select the menu OS Menu Printer Features gt Feature Sets Color settings 1 gt Distinguish Thin 10 2 x Lines 10 3 x 10 4 x 10 5x Color Settings 1 gt Distinguish Thin Lines Presets Standard Printer TOSHIBA e STUDIO6530C a a E ie Color Settings 1 Color Type Color Resolution 600 dpi Halftone Auto HH M Dist
29. Enter the adjustment mode 05 Change the setting value of the code 8243 to adjust a range for emphasizing thin lines Acceptable Default value range PDL Color 05 code Subcode Recommended value Black Min Set value larger than 1 PS3 Black Max Set value smaller than 200 1200dpi Color Min Wo ada Set value larger than 1 VERS Color Max Set value smaller than 255 After changing the value perform printing and check the image quality If further image quality adjustments are necessary follow the next step However the service technician shall judge whether or not the adjustment is to be performed in conjunction with the settings in steps 1 to 3 e STUDIO5520C 6520C 6530C 2008 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved 3 69 3 Printer specific Adjustments PcLe PS3 xes EED BI 4 Enter setting mode 08 Change the value for code 2548 to make the outline of the copied text thicker and clearer or thinner and finer This adjustment can be made applicable to all colors by selecting the corresponding subcode However it is recommended to enter the same setting value for all the subcodes unless otherwise required Acceptable Default range value Setting item 08 code Subcode Recommended value To make the outline of text thicker and clearer Potential on printing Set a value smaller than 5 white text 08 2548 C
30. For Macintosh am This adjustment will have an effect only on full color printing Open the print dialog box Set the value for Sharpness within a range of 1 to 4 Setting 4 provides the sharpest print image The menu to select varies according to the operating system Refer to the table below and select the menu OS Menu Printer Features gt Feature Sets Color settings 4 Sharpness Color Settings 2 gt Sharpness 10 2 x 10 3 x 10 4 x 10 5x Printer TOSHIBA e STUDIO6530C HJ o Color Settings 2 HB Presets Standard Color Balance Cyan 0 Magenta 0 Yellow 0 Brightness 0 PDFw Preview Cancel E Print Q Caution after the adjustment The adjustment may possibly cause rough edges of the image contained in low resolution bitmap data As a result outlined edges may look shaded black bands may appear and toner may be scattered around the lines Therefore carefully perform the adjustment while checking the printouts e STUDIO5520C 6520C 6530C 2008 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved 3 36 3 Printer specific Adjustments 3 11 To Obtain a Softer Image Before the adjustment After the adjustment Unadjusted settings A softer image is obtained Q Explanation Decrease the sharpness intensity under the menu on the printer driver in order to obtain a softer print image The sharpness adjustm
31. Increase the values for codes 7762 and 7763 to make the background lighter Accepta LEE 05 code Recommended value EE Default mode range value 0 to 255 Base original mode Automatic 05 7762 Set a value larger than Manual 05 7763 128 Text Photo Set the value in increments of approximately 25 while checking the copy image until the optimum value is obtained e STUDIO5520C 6520C 6530C 2008 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved 2 78 2 Copier specific Adjustments To copy while eliminating the background color to adjust the reference value for the background density adjustment This adjustment is effective when you do not copy the dark color of the background of an original a Enter the adjustment mode 05 Change the values for codes 7777 and 7778 to make the range correction operation fixed The code to be set differs depending on the density mode Select the 05 code for the target original mode and change the value to 0 Acceptable range Default value Original 05 code Recommend mode ed value Density mode Automatic 05 7777 que Manual 05 7778 i ix Explanation for setting values Setting Range correction value operation 0 Fixed 1 Varied To increase the sharpness intensity This adjustment is effective when you want to copy light text thin lines or illustrations more clearly a Enter the adjustment mode
32. Map 05 1793 0 1 2 Text Photo 05 1794 0 1 2 Text 05 1795 0 1 2 Printed image 05 1796 0 1 2 Photo 05 1797 0 1 2 Map 05 1798 0 1 2 Y Yellow Set a value smaller than 128 to decrease the density Black Set the value in increments of approximately 10 while checking the copy image until the optimum value is obtained The value for the code corresponding to the original mode Text Photo Text or Printed image will affect the copy image quality in the Full color mode and the Auto color mode The subcode varies according to the area where the density is adjusted Refer to the table below and set the subcode for the area to be adjusted Subcode Area where the density is adjusted Low density area Medium density area High density area e STUDIO5520C 6520C 6530C 2008 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved 2 14 2 Copier specific Adjustments Q Caution after the adjustment The adjustment may possibly cause offset failure particularly when the highly colored original is copied in the Photo mode Therefore carefully perform the adjustment while checking the copy image Q Remarks Enter a value within the recommended value range mentioned in the procedures Otherwise it may cause a loss in MFP performance including degradation in the image quality and a reduction in the life of the consumables e STUDIO5520
33. NV Black Over Print Text amp Graphic Restore Defaults Cancel Help lt Note gt The adjustment may provide all colored text in black After changing the option on the printer driver print and check the print image quality If further image quality adjustments are still necessary the service technician must use the next procedure because text may not be defined as 100 black on the file e STUDIO5520C 6520C 6530C 2008 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved 3 85 3 Printer specific Adjustments PCL6 PS3 XPS Mac This adjustment will have an effect only on Black and white mode printing M 4 Enter adjustment mode 05 Change the values for codes 8210 to 8212 or 8249 to 8254 to adjust the threshold values for Pure Gray and Pure Black to adjust the area to print only using the K toner Adjust the value for 05 code corresponding to the print option to be applied Apply to PDL Item Subcode Image quality type Printing on Macintosh is performed in PostScript See the PS3 row in the table below Eu Apply to 05 code Subcode Recommended value value range PCL6 05 8210 0 1 2 3 Ed 05 8252 0 1 2 3 4 Set a value smaller than 8 8 8 8 8 05 8249 0 1 2 3 4 the default to decrease 8 8 8 8 8 the area to print only 05 8211 Q U2B using the K tones 1 1 1 8 Graphics PS3 05 8253 0 1 2 3 4 110255 1 1 1 8 1 05 8250 0 1 2 3 4 Seta value larger than 1 1 1 8 1 the def
34. PCL6 This adjustment will have an effect only on Black and white mode printing Open the property page of the printer driver Press the Setting button in the Image Quality tab Mark the Pure Black checkbox in the Basic tab Select Text Graphic amp Image from among the Apply to options Setting Basic Color Balance Image Attribute Custom Color Settings r ae Halftone __ Resolution dd Auto V Pure Gray x Eg 600dpi Use Black for All Text Distinguish Thin Lines MV Pure Black Apply to v Black Over Print Test amp Graphic Restore Defaults Cancel Help e STUDIO5520C 6520C 6530C 2008 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved 3 83 3 Printer specific Adjustments For Macintosh am This adjustment will have an effect only on full color printing Open the print dialog box Select Black Text Graphic and Image from among the Pure Black and Gray options The menu to select varies according to the operating system Refer to the table below and select the menu Os Menu 10 2 x Printer Features gt Feature Sets Color settings 2 Pure Black and Gray 10 3 x 10 4 x 10 5x Color Settings 1 Pure Black and Gray Printer TOSHIBA e STUDIO6530C ie p Presets Standard Hd E Color Settings 1 Color Type Color E Resolution 600 dpi H4 Halftone Auto LE
35. Printer specific Adjustments M 1 If printing is performed on a PCL6 printer driver select a PS3 printer driver Hint If printing is performed on a PCL6 printer driver or if a file or a graphic application created on a DTP application such as Illustrator QuarkXPress FreeHand or CorelDraw is printed using the CMYK toners or a high definition PDF file created on these applications is printed black text may not be converted into 10096 black But if printing is performed on a PS3 printer driver black text can be printed in black as shown on the file After printing on the PS3 driver print and check the print image quality If further image quality adjustments are still necessary use the next procedure Ill 2 Mark the Pure Black checkbox on the printer driver Select Text Graphic amp Image from among the Apply to options Hint Text on the Web page may be raster data image created in GIF or JPEG format Black and white data created in PDF format by scanning the original are also raster data If the Pure Black checkbox is marked on the printer driver Auto is selected from among the Apply to options by default Raster data are handled as an image which is intended to improve the texture and the 4 color toners C M Y and K will be used to print black If Text Graphic amp Image is selected from among the Apply to options only the K toner will be used to print black on raster data For Windows
36. it will affect every user who uses the printer by connecting it to the MFP After the adjustment the values changed will be applied to all printouts for the Image Quality Type and Halftone options For instance if the value for 05 code for Smooth is changed it will be applied to printing performed with Halftone Smooth or Auto selected Carefully perform the adjustment being aware that the image quality of all future printouts will be changed when printing out originals other than the one that is used for the adjustment Q Caution after the adjustment If White is selected in the Twin color mode all areas other than black will not be printed White toner will not be used to print these areas e STUDIO5520C 6520C 6530C 2008 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved 3 102 3 Printer specific Adjustments 3 24 2 To Adjust the Sharpness IM 1 Select Twin Color from among the Color options on the printer driver For Windows Open the property page of the printer driver Select Twin Color from among the Color options in the Basic tab Press the Details button Select the color to use for the area other than black from among the Color options TOSHIBA e STUDIO6530CSeries PS3 Printing Preferences Basic Finishing Paper Handling Image Quality Effect Others Print Job Original Paper Size Normal Print v E E Letter 81 2 x11 x M Print Paper Size Manua
37. or at a user s request This adjustment will have an effect only on the image scanned in the Black mode or the Gray scale mode e STUDIO5520C 6520C 6530C 2008 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved 5 17 5 Scanning specific Adjustments Q Procedures The service technician must perform all adjustments 1 Enter adjustment mode 05 Change the values for codes 880 to 883 to adjust the gamma curve balance of the low medium and high density areas Acceptable value range Color mode Original mode 05 code Subcode Recommended value Text Phot gt 1 2 ud Pae bd Set a value smaller than 128 Text 05 881 0 1 2 to decrease the density 0 to 255 Photo 05 882 0 1 2 Set a value larger than 128 to increase the density Gray scale 05 883 0 1 2 Set the value in increments of approximately 20 while checking the scanned in image until the optimum value is obtained The subcode varies according to the area where the density is adjusted Refer to the table below and set the subcode for the area to be adjusted Subcode Area where the density is adjusted Low density area Medium density area High density area Gradation in the Black mode will vary if the medium density area is mainly adjusted But remember that adjusting the low or high density area will rarely affect the gradation in the Black mode Q Caution after the adjustme
38. some setting values Subcodes to be entered differ depending on the target density area Refer to the table above to enter the subcode for the area to be adjusted The density of thin text or illustrations is changed by adjusting mainly the setting value for the medium or high density area Do not change the setting value for the low density area because if the subcode is set at 0 the density of the low density area is adjusted but there is little or no effect on changing the density of thin text or illustrations After changing the value make a copy and check the image quality If further image quality adjustments are necessary reset all the values changed in steps 1 to 4 above to the default one and then follow the next step e STUDIO5520C 6520C 6530C 2008 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved 2 10 2 Copier specific Adjustments P 5 Enter setting mode 08 Change the value for code 2548 to make the outline of the copied text thicker and clearer or thinner and finer This adjustment can be made applicable to all colors by selecting the corresponding subcode However it is recommended to enter the same setting value for all the subcodes unless otherwise required Acceptable Default range value Setting item 08 code Subcode Recommended value To make the outline of text thicker and clearer Potential on printing Set a value smaller than 5 white text 08 2548 Correction setting To make the
39. 0 to 255 Set a value larger than 20 to make the changing amount larger Dark step Light step Moving the indicator to the side Dark step Moving the indicator to the D side Note Ifthe setting value is too small or too large the density level may not be changed the number of steps moved may not be detected even if the user moves the indicator on the touch panel To adjust gamma balance in medium and high density areas a Enter the adjustment mode 05 Change the value for the code 949 to adjust the gamma balance in each of medium and high density areas Accepta ble range value Base original 05 code Subcode Recommended value mode Default Text Photo 05 949 1 2 Set a mm than 915255 Set the value in increments of approximately 20 while checking the copy image until the optimum value is obtained Note that gradations density level in the medium and high density areas may be reversed with some setting values Subcodes to be entered differ depending on the target density area Refer to the table below to enter the subcode for the area to be adjusted Area where the density is adjusted Medium density area High density area Subcode e STUDIO5520C 6520C 6530C 2008 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved 2 76 To make background lighter a Enter the adjustment mode 05 Increase the values for codes 7279 and 7280 to make the
40. 25 50 75 100 _ Assigned adjustment value of sharpness 50 75 100 100 am Since 25 is assigned to the center the image quality remains the same even if the indicator is changed from 3 to 4 lt Note gt Sharpening the copy image and Minimizing moir are mutually contradictory When an adjustment is performed to sharpen the copy image moir may occur e STUDIO5520C 6520C 6530C 2 42 2008 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved Q Caution after the adjustment Nothing in particular Q Remarks Enter a value within the recommended value range mentioned in the procedures Otherwise it may cause a loss in copier performance including degradation in the image quality e STUDIO5520C 6520C 6530C 2008 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved 2 43 2 Copier specific Adjustments 2 10 To Make Photo Edges Look Softer Before the adjustment After the adjustment The edges contours of the image are highly The edges look soft visible Q Explanation When a photo image is copied the contours or edges of the image sometimes become highly visible on the copy Perform adjustment regarding image processing sharpness intensity in order to soften the edges of the image Q Procedures You can start with any of the procedures But it is recommended to perform the procedures in order as listed below You can use one procedure in conjunction with another But if this changes
41. 3 Printer specific Adjustments 3 14 To Clearly Print Light Colored Thin Lines or Text Before the adjustment After the adjustment se E s Five Storied Pagoda Relocation Issues and Trends Relocation Issues and Trends l l m Country A m Country A M Country B E Country B B Country C B Country C M Country D E Country D 2044 2045 2046 2047 2048 2049 2050 2044 2045 2046 2047 2048 2049 2050 Relocation to higher ground depends on climatic trends Relocation to higher ground depends on climatic trends Light colored thin lines and text are dotted on The light colored thin lines and text are clearly the printout printed out Q Explanation When light colored thin lines and text are printed they may be dotted on the printout Change the options on the printer driver adjust the color balance or gamma curve balance in order to print them out clearly Q Procedures The procedure to use varies depending on whether to adjust the print image quality in the Color mode or in the Black and White mode Refer to the procedure corresponding to the user s particular request The item to set varies depending on the type of data to adjust Select the effective option according to the data format to adjust such as a print image raster data text font and line drawing graphic data e STUDIO5520C 6520C 6530C 2008 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved 3 47 3 Printer specific Adjustments
42. Colorimetric Saturation Absolute Colorimetric d Click Browse of Import new Profile to select a file for the profile Then click Import Maintenance Destination Profiles Default Profile OutputCMYK_v10 MS_OP_A00 icc o peser Us Sheettea Coated v2 USSheetfedCosted icc o ro uen e Click Previous The display returns to the ICC Profile submenu f Click Save A confirmation dialog box is displayed g Click OK For the details of TopAccess see the TopAccess Guide e STUDIO5520C 6520C 6530C 2008 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved 3 117 3 Printer specific Adjustments Ps3 X xPS E i 3 Open the Properties page of the printer driver and then select Advanced on the Image Quality Type option on the Image Quality tab menu Then click Setting TOSHIBA e STUDIO6530CSeries PS3 Printing Preferences Basic Finishing Paper Handling Image Quality Effect Others Print Job Normal Print bd fei Image Quality Type Profile Name General Li Photograph Presentation Line Art Advanced Graphics Text Profile None Save Profile Delete Restore Defaults HW 4 Select the uploaded CMYK profile on CMYK Source Profile on the Advanced tab menu Setting Basic Color Balance Image Attribute Advanced Source Profiles RGB Source Profile Sourc
43. Correction setting K 08 2548 To make the outline of text thicker and clearer Set a value smaller than 5 To make the outline of text thinner and finer Set a value larger than 5 To check the amount changed with this setting it is recommended to set the value at 2 or 3 first to decrease it and then to set the value at 7 or 8 first to increase it Then check the copy image and Py g increase or decrease the value further so that the image will be adjusted finely After changing the value perform automatic calibration Refer to step 1 in 1 1 To Obtain a Darker Image to perform automatic calibration If further adjustments are necessary after performing step 7 you can repeat steps 1 to 6 When repeating these steps however adjust the value while checking the copy image carefully e STUDIO5520C 6520C 6530C 2 4 2008 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved 2 Copier specific Adjustments Q Caution after the adjustment The adjustment may possibly cause an increase in the amount of toner used moir blurred text small dark text blurred faint text fine outlines of text shredded diminished photo images or gradational images less accurate reproducibility of halftones or in some consumption conditions of consumables background fogging or a decrease in the amount of developer material carrier streaks Therefore carefully perform the adjustment while checking th
44. High E Cyan lp 4 4 M Magenta 21 H 4 4 Yellow seo zw B Black jo zu EE Restore Defaults DK Cancel After changing the option on the printer driver print and check the print image quality If further image quality adjustments are still necessary use the next procedure PCL6 PS3 XPS This adjustment will have an effect only on Black and white mode printing IJ 6 Enter adjustment mode 05 Change the values for codes 8042 to 8065 or 8268 to 8275 to adjust the color density Color balance Adjust the value for 05 code corresponding to the print option to be applied PDL and Halftone Ex When printing on Windows is performed with the following options selected PCL6 Image Quality Type General Halftone Auto gt Text area graphic area and image area Change the values for Y 05 8058 M 05 8059 C 05 8060 and K 05 8061 When printing on Macintosh is performed with the following option selected Image Type Photograph Halftone Smooth gt Change the values for Y 05 8050 M 05 8051 C 05 8052 and K 05 8053 Printing on Macintosh is performed in PostScript See the PS3 row in the table below e STUDIO5520C 6520C 6530C 2008 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved 3 87 3 Printer specific Adjustments The hue of the black text printed using all color toners C M Y and K will look much clearer if the amount of the C cyan toner used is larger than the
45. M magenta or Y yellow toner Remember that adjusting the density of K black does not affect the hue of the black text if all color toners are used to print the text Color to Recommended Acceptable uer POL Rafone tos code subcode Pi iEn logs Detaut PS3 y api Yellow ps3 1200dpi Detail 05 8046 Smooth 05 8059 PS3 M 00dpi Magenta 00 Detail 05 8047 Set a value larger 0 to 255 128 Smooth 05 8060 than 128 TT 004 12004 05 8044 0 1 2 Detail 05 8048 Smooth 05 8061 T k 600d Bad pss 12008pi Set the value in increments of approximately 20 while checking the printouts until the optimum value is obtained e STUDIO5520C 6520C 6530C 2008 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved 3 88 3 Printer specific Adjustments Halftone refers to how halftones are printed Two options are available Smooth which is intended to improve the reproducibility of gradation and Detail which is intended to print halftones in details with the high frequency The halftone option to be applied in printing can be selected from among the Halftone options on the printer driver Windows or in the print dialog box Macintosh Auto is selected from among the Apply to options by default It is intended to automatically select Smooth or Detail in accordance with Apply to of the halftone option the selected Color and Image Quality Type op
46. POE Text Photo 05 1779 0 1 Text 05 1780 0 1 Printed image 05 1781 0 1 Photo 05 1782 0 1 Map 05 1783 0 1 Text Photo 05 1784 0 1 Text 05 1785 0 1 Printed image 05 1786 0 1 Y Yellow M M t Magenta Photo 05 1787 0 1 Set a value larger than 128 Map 05 1788 0A to increase the density Text Photo 05 1789 0 1 Text 05 1790 0 1 Printed image 05 1791 0 1 Photo 05 1792 0 1 Map 05 1793 0 1 Text Photo 05 1794 0 1 Text 05 1795 0 1 Printed image 05 1796 0 1 PS Photo 05 1797 0A Map 05 1798 0 1 0 to 255 Set a value smaller than 128 to decrease the density Set the value in increments of approximately 10 while checking the copy image until the optimum value is obtained The value for the code corresponding to the original mode Text Photo Text or Printed image will affect the copy image quality in the Full color mode and the Auto color mode The subcode varies according to the area where the density is adjusted Refer to the table below and set the subcode for the area to be adjusted The background highlight density will vary if the low or medium density area is mainly adjusted Setting 2 for the subcode allows you to adjust the high density area But it will not affect the background density Therefore never change the value for the high density area Subcode Area where the density is adjusted 0 Low density
47. Q Procedures Both the service technician and the user can perform all adjustments e STUDIO5520C 6520C 6530C 2008 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved 3 77 3 Printer specific Adjustments C Bl 1 Open the property page of the printer driver Press the Setting button in the Image Quality tab Mark the Use Black for All Text checkbox in the Basic tab This adjustment will be effective only if a file created on a general application such as Microsoft Office is printed in PostScript PS3 It may not be effective if a file created on a graphic application e g Illustrator or a DTP application e g QuarkXPress is printed or a PDF file created on these applications is printed Setting Basic Color Balance Image Attribute Custom Color Settings r Resolution 600dpi Distinguish Thin Lines IV Pure Black Apply to IV Pure Gray Auto zl Apply to JV Black Over Print Text amp Graphic Restore Defaults Cancel Help Q Caution after the adjustment Nothing in particular O Remarks Not all colored text may be printed in black depending on the type of text e g text larger than 72 points e STUDIO5520C 6520C 6530C 2008 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved 3 78 3 Printer specific Adjustments 3 20 To Ignore Blank Pages for Printing Before the adjustment After the adjustment A blank page is also delivered
48. RED selected in Twin color selectable 05 7642 mode The subcode varies according to the area where the density is adjusted Refer to the table below and set the subcode for the area to be adjusted Subcode Area where the density is adjusted High density area Medium density area Low density area Q Caution after the adjustment Nothing in particular e STUDIO5520C 6520C 6530C 2008 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved 2 69 2 Copier specific Adjustments 2 17 To Adjust the Image Quality Scanned from the RADF Before the adjustment l After the adjustment The reproducibility of background may vary The gap in the reproducibility of background depending on how to scan an original is reduced Q Explanation The reproducibility of the background may vary depending on the type of original or whether the scanning is of an original placed on the original glass or one fed from the RADF Adjust the reproducibility of background while scanning an original fed from the RADF in order to minimize the gap in the reproducibility of the background using either method of how to scan an original Note that the adjustment results of steps 1 and 2 will be applied only to the Red and Black mode The adjustment result of step 3 will be applied to both of the Red and Black mode and the Twin Color mode enabling selection of other colors Only if further adjustment is still desir
49. RGB Source Profile SourceRGB_v10 CMYK Source Profile SourceCMYK_v10 v I Apply to Device Color Only r Destination Profile sa Profile 4 OutputCMYK_v10 As Renderi U S Sheetfed Coated v2 Cp Euroscale Coated v2 Japan Color 2001 Coated PENE Comte C Saturation C Absolute Colorimetric 1j Restore Defaults Update Now e STUDIO5520C 6520C 6530C 2008 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved 3 123 Q Caution after the adjustment Nothing in particular Remarks Colors printed in this procedure may not be completely the same as those of Fiery images because the color measurement method of this procedure is not completely equal to the one for Fiery e STUDIO5520C 6520C 6530C 2008 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved 3 124 E 3 Printer specific Adjustments 3 25 5 To Perform Further Adjustment After Using ICC Profiles Q Explanation After printer profiles were applied by selecting Advanced on the Image Quality Type option on the printer driver menu a user can perform further image adjustments Q Procedures Both the service technician and the user can perform all settings M 1 Open the Properties page of the printer driver and then select Advanced on the Image Quality Type option on the Image Quality tab menu Then click Setting TOSHIBA e STUDIO6530CSeries PS3 Printing Preferences Basic Finishing Paper Hand
50. Substance FETE Substance name 1 Zinc water soluble compounds 1 Zinc water soluble compounds 16 2 aminoethanol 16 2 aminoethano 43 Ethylene glycol 43 Ethylene glycol 63 Xylene 63 Xylene Chromium VI compounds 69 Chromium VI compounds 227 Touene 227 Tolene 230 Lead and its 230 Lead and its nds 243 Berum and ts alr so Span 243 _ Barium and its water soluble junds 283 Hydrogen fluoride and its water soluble salts 283 Hydrogen fluonde and its water soluble salts 69 O4 Boron and its compounds 304 _ Boron and its compounds 6 3 34 Molybdenum and ts compounds 346 Molybdenum and its compounds When a twin color copy is made in the red The blend of undesired colors in the black area and black mode red may be blended in a is reduced part of black area Q Explanation When a twin color copy is made red may be blended into the black area or colors other than black on the twin color copy may look different from what the user desires Adjust the tint of the colors the reproducibility of black in the Red and black mode or the boundary between black and colors other than black in order to reduce a blend of undesired colors into the black area or adjust the tint of colors other than black Q Procedures The procedure to use varies depending on whether to adjust the tint of colors other than black the reproducibility of b
51. TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved 3 1 3 Printer specific Adjustments 3 1 To Maintain a Steady Color Balance Before the adjustment After the adjustment ar LE lt EN _ p The color balance varies according to a change The color balance is constantly maintained in the environment or a lapse of time Q Explanation The color balance varies according to a change in the environment replacement of the consumables and so forth Periodically adjust the color reproducibility automatic calibration in order to constantly maintain a steady color balance on the printouts Automatic calibration 1s the basic adjustment to accurately reproduce colors on the printouts When you would like to accurately reproduce the desired hue or when you have replaced the consumables and changed the operating conditions perform automatic calibration to ensure the color reproducibility Q Procedures Perform the adjustment in accordance with the procedures below The service technician must perform all adjustments e STUDIO5520C 6520C 6530C 2008 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved 3 2 3 Printer specific Adjustments xPs JEU T Wl 1 Perform automatic calibration to correct variations in image density ADMIN is selected from among the CALIBRATION DISPLAY LEVEL options by default In other words an administrator is authorized to operate automatic calibration But the USER option can also be
52. Text 05 605 Photo 05 606 Image smoothing 05 7809 ACS Black Set a value larger than Text Photo DR dE 128 ACS Black 05 7807 Text ACS Black Photo Default 0 to 255 05 7808 Setting 0 provides the softest image while setting 255 provides the sharpest image Changing the values for these codes will change the sharpness intensity when the Sharpness indicator in the IMAGE menu is set to the center Remember that 1 step of the indicator will increase or decrease the sharpness intensity by 25 If the sharpness intensity of the center value is changed each step of the indicator will be changed accordingly For instance if the center value is increased by 25 sharper the value of each step of the indicator will also be increased by 25 sharper After increasing the sharpness intensity copy and check the copy image quality If further image quality adjustments are still necessary use the next procedure e STUDIO5520C 6520C 6530C 2008 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved 2 2 2 Copier specific Adjustments E 4 Press the BASIC button on the Control Panel Select TEXT from among the original mode options To have TEXT selected from among the original mode options by default refer to procedure 1 in 2 8 To Eliminate Moir After selecting the Text mode copy and check the copy image quality If further image quality adjustments are still necessary use t
53. Thick 1 Thick 2 Thick 3 OHP 05 2935 Special 1 Special 2 Recycled paper Thick 4 Plain paper Thick 1 Thick 2 Thick 3 OHP 05 2936 Special 1 Special 2 Recycled paper Thick 4 Plain paper Thick 1 Thick 2 Thick 3 OHP 05 2937 Special 1 Special 2 Recycled paper Thick 4 Front refers to the printed side in the simplex mode or the side that is delivered facing downwards in the duplex Full color SID AP Aj IR Io lo IAB SIND Io lo ISA R IS ID IR SLINI IDAM I o2 ID Is oo mode Back refers to the printed side that is delivered facing upwards in the duplex mode The table below shows you the acceptable paper weight for the paper type Paper type Acceptable paper weight Plain paper 64 to 105 g m 16 to 20 Ib Bond Thick 1 106 to 163 g n Max 60 Ib Cover Thick 2 164 to 209 g n Max 110 Ib Index Thick 3 210 to 256 g n Max 140 lb Index Thick 4 257 to 300 g m Max 110 Ib Cover After adjusting the transfer roller bias output perform automatic calibration For further information regarding the procedures refer to procedure 1 in 1 1 To Obtain a Darker Image e STUDIO5520C 6520C 6530C 2008 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved 1 11 1 Gene
54. To Obtain a Sharper Print Image Print data Unadjusted settings The edge of the print image is so enhanced that it looks sharper Q Explanation Increase the sharpness intensity under the menu on the printer driver in order to obtain a sharper print image The sharpness adjustment will have an effect particularly on photo images such as BMP GIF JPEG and TIFF e STUDIO5520C 6520C 6530C 2008 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved 3 34 3 Printer specific Adjustments Q Procedures Both the service technician and the user can perform all adjustments M 1 Change the Sharpness option on the printer driver For Windows Open the property page of the printer driver Press the Setting button in the Image Quality tab This adjustment will have an effect only on Auto or Color mode printing Set the value for Sharpness within a range of 1 to 4 in the Image Attribute tab Setting 4 provides the sharpest print image Setting Basic Color Balance mage Attribute Contrast Brightness 4 f a gt Background Adjustment LM prop UE Saturation W Use Sharpness Filter 4 E Restore Defaults DK Cancel Help Ges cie Sharpness adjustment is not available when 1200 dpi is selected for PS3 printer driver e STUDIO5520C 6520C 6530C 2008 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved 3 35 3 Printer specific Adjustments
55. Toner from Coming Off 3 92 3 23 To Register the Image Quality Adjusted Corresponding to a Preference To use the Custom Color Settings 3 94 3 24 To Print a Full Color Original in Two Colors 3 97 3 24 11 TOAdJUSTCOlOTS SR ee u 3 98 3 242 To Adjust the Sharpness 3 103 3 24 3 To Print a Full Color Original in Two Colors 3 105 9 29 10 Use ICC Pri ctc 3 106 3 25 1 To Create ICC Profiles for Printing on the Paper to be Used 3 107 3 25 2 To Print Precise Colors Using Existing RGB Source ICC Profiles 3 112 3 25 3 To Perform Simulated Printing with CMYK Inks of Each Ink Manufacturer 3 116 3 25 4 To Convert Colors with Specified Source ICC Profiles Not Using Embedded ICC Profiles 3 120 3 25 5 To Perform Further Adjustment After Using ICC Profiles 3 125 4 e Filing specific Adjustments 4 1 To Clearly Store a B W Image in the Auto Color Mode 4 2 To Store an Original while Reducing the File Size 4 3 To Store a Color Photo Image while Minimizing Moir 4 4 To Match the Color Balance on the Original To adjust the color balance in Print to Box 4 5 To Scan and Print while Minimizing Moir
56. adjustments are still necessary use the next procedure b When scanning the original press the COMMON SETTING button on the Control Panel Press the button to decrease the sharpness intensity Decrease the sharpness intensity by 1 step from the current value To eliminate the background density Use steps a to b to perform the adjustment a When scanning the original press the COMMON SETTING button on the Control Panel Press the button to decrease the background density After decreasing the background density scan the original and check the scanned in image quality Only if the user s desired image quality is still not obtained after the above procedure has been performed scan the original in JPEG or PDF Q Caution after the adjustment The adjustment may possibly cause blurred text noise or vary the hues of areas Therefore carefully perform the adjustment while checking the scanned in image quality e STUDIO5520C 6520C 6530C 2008 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved 5 12 5 Scanning specific Adjustments 5 5 To Sharply Scan the Original To increase the sharpness intensity Before the adjustment After the adjustment The image looks too soft and blurred The edges are enhanced The image looks sharp Q Explanation Adjust the sharpness intensity in order to sharply scan the soft and blurred original This adjustment will have an effect on the image scanned in all color modes F
57. by making it correspond to 0 Otherwise it may cause a loss in MFP performance including degradation in the image quality and a reduction in the life of the consumables While replacing any consumable also check the slit glass in the laser optical unit and thoroughly clean it if it is soiled Q Caution after the adjustment After the fusing temperature was adjusted in step 2 above printing interruption may occur due to improper fusing temperature Therefore adjust the value carefully If you want to change the conditions for printing interruption change the value of the 08 code 5409 abnormality process starting temperature setting recycled paper For the setting values refer to the Service Manual U Remarks Enter the value mentioned in the procedures or one within the recommended value range for the adjustment Otherwise it may cause a loss in MFP performance including degradation in the image quality and a reduction in the life of the consumables The desired image quality may not be obtained depending on the type of paper used In this case use the recommended paper and then print or adjust the image quality f an image problem occurs when you use the other paper type temporarily set the values of the 08 codes 2934 to 2937 bias offset and 5293 to 5296 fusing temperature during printing back to the default ones Then perform the adjustment again When replacing any consumable refer t
58. from Box To adjust the copy image quality Use steps a through 1 to perform automatic calibration a Press the USER FUNCTIONS button on the Control Panel to enter the User Functions menu b Press the ADMIN tab c Enter the 6 to 10 digit administrator password Press the ENTER button d Press the GENERAL button e Press the CALIBRATION button f Press the COPY button g Press the CALIBRATION button to print out the test chart h Place the printed test chart on the original glass 1 Press the START button to perform calibration When the calibration comes to an end the message Scanning and calibrating will disappear Asaresult of the above steps the copy image quality will be corrected in the Full Color mode and Black and White mode simultaneously To correct variations in image density by performing automatic calibration for each paper type refer to 1 Perform automatic calibration for each paper type to correct variations in image density in 2 13 To Obtain a Good Color Balance on Thick Paper To adjust the print image quality Use steps a through j to perform automatic calibration a Press the USER FUNCTIONS button on the Control Panel to enter the User Functions menu b Press the ADMIN tab c Enter the 6 to 10 digit administrator password Press the ENTER button d Press the GENERAL button e Press the CALIBRATION button f Press the PRINT button g Pre
59. hand if the value is decreased it will be more likely to be recognized as full color Acceptable Default value range Threshold to adjust 05 code Threshold when an original is placed on the original glass or when the RADF is used eee Diosna 2 Set the value in increments of approximately 20 while checking the copy image until the optimum value is obtained Q Caution after the adjustment When a non standard sized original is copied an area outside the original or the original cover may also be scanned This may prevent the original size from being accurately detected If the original cover is soiled the type of original cannot be accurately detected Therefore instruct the users to clean the original cover on a routine basis once a week After the threshold in the Auto color mode is adjusted based on a particular type of original other types of original may not be correctly detected Therefore carefully perform the adjustment while checking whether any type of original is correctly detected e STUDIO5520C 6520C 6530C 2008 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved 2 65 2 Copier specific Adjustments Before the adjustment Conglomerate Group s PRTR data Ursa Major Operations Conglomerate Corp Substance number Substance name 2 16 To Adjust the Twin Color Copy Image Quality After the adjustment Conglomerate Group s PRTR data Ursa Major Operations Conglomerate Corp
60. in the Full color black hue on the monitor mode Q Explanation Text looks black on the monitor But if it is printed in the Full color mode with Auto selected from among the Color options all color toners C M Y and K will be used to print it depending on the application in use As a result the black hue on the printout looks different from what the user desires This problem is caused by the application specifications not by the printer Particularly the following factors may print black text using all color toners C M Y and K when a PDF file is printed out The file of black text CMY 0 K 100 is printed on the PCL6 printer driver Black text is treated as image data instead of text data on the file Black text is not defined as 100 black RGB 0 or CMY 0 K 100 on the file Change the option on the printer driver or adjust the color balance in order to nearly match the hue of the black text on the file in which these factors may be included with the black hue As a point to remember determine whether the text to adjust is entered as an actual text font or as a graphic or image data Q Procedures Perform the adjustment in accordance with the procedures below Both the service technician and the user can use procedures 1 to 3 and 5 Only the service technician must use procedures 4 and 6 e STUDIO5520C 6520C 6530C 2008 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved 3 82 3
61. in the amount of developer material carrier streaks Therefore carefully perform the adjustment while checking the copy image Q Remarks Enter a value within the recommended value range mentioned in the procedures Otherwise it may cause a loss in MFP performance including degradation in the image quality and a reduction in the life of the consumables f you perform only step 6 above changing the setting value of code 08 2548 as an image quality adjustment for a certain color it may cause an extra increase or decrease in the amount of the toner used for this color compared with that for the other colors or it may create a difference in the reproducibility of halftones e STUDIO5520C 6520C 6530C 2008 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved 2 8 2 Copier specific Adjustments 2 1 3 To Adjust the Copy Image Quality in the Auto Color Mode You can start with any of the procedures But it is recommended to perform the procedures in order as listed below You can use one procedure in conjunction with another But if this changes the image quality more than required or loses the effectiveness of the adjustment restore the settings made in the previously used procedure to the original ones Then use other procedures Both the service technician and the user can use procedures 1 and 2 Only the service technician must use procedure 3 4 and 5 I 1 Press the BASIC button on the Control Panel Press
62. may not be effective if a file created on a graphic application e g Illustrator or a DTP application e g QuarkXPress is printed or a PDF file created on these applications is printed For Windows PCL6 This adjustment will have an effect only on Auto or Color mode printing Open the property page of the printer driver Press the Setting button in the Image Quality tab Mark the Pure Gray checkbox in the Basic tab Select Text Graphic amp Image from among the Apply to options Setting Basic Color Balance Image Attribute Custom Color Settings Halftone Resolution di Auto Use Black for All Text Distinguish iv Pure Black MV Pure Gray Thin Lines N Black Over Print Restore Defaults Text Black K toner 600dpi Apply to Text Graphic amp Imag Apply to Text amp Graphic Y Cancel Help Black K toner Text amp Graphic Black K toner Text Graphic amp Image Black K toner Graphic Black K toner Color CMYK toner Black K toner Black K toner Image Color CMYK toner Color CMYK toner Color CMYK toner Black K toner The above table shows the sample combinations of when the Image Quality Type is General When Auto is selected the areas to be applied are automatically selected according to the Image Quality Type e STUDIO5520C 6520C 6530C 2008 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORAT
63. not stones Win an art Alber of oes Every remiro um of the meaning cf raai beauty Black text looks smudged due to toner Smudges are eliminated scattering around the text Q Explanation When highly colored text and lines where a large amount of toner is used created on raster data image such as BMP GIF JPEG and TIFF are printed the text and lines look smudged due to toner scattering around the text and lines Adjust the sharpness intensity or the amount of toner used in order to obtain a clearer print image Hint Ifsmudged text and lines appear on the print image in PDF format on Adobe Reader unmark the Print as image checkbox to print out the image If the Print as image checkbox is marked text and lines will be printed as raster data bitmap image and may be smudged Q Procedures Perform the adjustment in accordance with the procedures below Both the service technician and the user can perform the adjustment for Windows Only the service technician can perform the adjustment for Macintosh e STUDIO5520C 6520C 6530C 2008 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved 3 43 3 Printer specific Adjustments M 1 Change the Use Sharpness Filter option on the printer driver For Windows PCL6 This adjustment will have an effect only on Auto or Color mode printing Open the property page of the printer driver Press the Setting button in the Image Quality tab Uncheck t
64. procedure 4 IIIJ 1 When scanning the original press the COMMON SETTING button on the Control Panel Select PRTD IMAGE from among the original mode options This adjustment will be effective only if TEXT or PHOTO is initially selected from among the original mode options This adjustment will have an effect only on the image stored in the Full color mode including the Auto color mode After changing the original mode scan and store the original Then print and check the print image quality If further image quality adjustments are still necessary use other procedures e STUDIO5520C 6520C 6530C O 2008 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved 4 9 4 e Filing specific Adjustments ED M 2 When scanning the original press the COMMON SETTING button on the Control Panel Select a lower resolution in the resolution option 200 dpi is selected from among the resolution options by default If moir occurs in a resolution of 200 dpi select a lower resolution 150 dpi is recommended After changing the resolution scan and store the original Then print and check the print image quality If you do not prefer to decrease a resolution or if moir still occurs even in a lower resolution use other procedures Scan to Box WU I 3 When scanning press the COMMON SETTING button on the Control Panel Adjust the sharpness intensity Press the button on the indicator to increase the shar
65. quality If further image quality adjustments is necessary go to the next step 2 Copier specific Adjustments HI D 2 Press the IMAGE button on the Control Panel Press the SHARPNESS button 7795 and 7807 to 7809 to adjust the default value for the sharpness intensity Decreasing the sharpness intensity will minimize moir Color mode Original mode 05 code Recommended value Accepta ble value range 3 Enter adjustment mode 05 Change the values for codes 604 to 606 922 1737 to 1741 1757 Default Text Photo 05 604 Text 05 605 Photo 05 606 User custom 05 922 Image smoothing 05 7809 Set a value smaller than 128 28 to 127 0 to 255 Full color Text Photo 05 1737 Text 05 1738 Printed image 05 1739 Photo 05 1740 Map 05 1741 User custom 05 7795 Set a value smaller than 128 28 to 127 0 to 255 ACS Black Text Photo 05 1757 Text 05 7807 Photo 05 7808 Set a value smaller than 128 28 to 127 0 to 255 The smaller the value is the weaker the sharpness intensity becomes The larger the setting value is the stronger the sharpness intensity becomes Changing the values for these codes will change the sharpness intensity when the Sharpness indicator in
66. settings made 1n the previously used procedure to the original ones Then use other procedures Both the service technician and the user can use procedures 1 2 and 4 Only the service technician must use procedures 3 5 6 and 7 1 Press the BASIC button on the Control Panel Press the button to increase the copy density After increasing the copy density copy and check the copy image quality With the copy density set to the maximum if further image quality adjustments are still necessary use the next procedure 2 Press the IMAGE button on the Control Panel Press the SHARPNESS button Press the SHARP button to increase the sharpness intensity After increasing the sharpness intensity copy and check the copy image quality With the sharpness intensity set to the maximum if further image quality adjustments are still necessary the service technician must use the following procedures 3 Enter adjustment mode 05 Increase the values for codes 604 to 606 1757 and 7807 to 7809 to make the copied text darker sharpness level increases The code to use varies depending on the original mode Text Photo Text or Photo Adjust the value for 05 code corresponding to the original mode in which you would like to improve the image quality and set values larger than 128 for codes 05 604 605 Recommended Acceptable value value range Original mode 05 code Text Photo 05 604
67. speed decelerates to 17 5 sheets per minute A4 LT after the adjustment The thick paper mode cannot be set for the LCF Large Capacity Feeder optional Therefore the maximum number of sheets acceptable for continuous printing should be the one for the drawer However in the copying mode you can set the thick paper mode to more than one drawer and copy more paper continuously with the automatic drawer change function The density level of the halftone image may differ from that of the plain paper mode after the adjustment The PM counter value increases by 2 counts for 1 sheet of thick paper Remarks Enter the value mentioned in the procedures or one within the recommended value range for the adjustment Otherwise it may cause a loss in MFP performance including slowdown in the copying or printing speed When replacing any consumable refer to the relevant information in the Service Manual and Service Handbook e STUDIO5520C 6520C 6530C 2008 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved 1 20 1 General Adjustments Copying Printing and e Filing Output from Box 1 5 To Correct Out of Registration Colors Before the adjustment After the adjustment Paper feeding direction Paper feeding direction The text and background are misaligned or out Text is aligned with the background and a clear of registration copy print image is obtained Q Explanation Co
68. step b To reduce the blurred area of text and photos Both the service technician and the user can use other procedures Note Slim PDF will be available only if SCAN TO FILE OR USB or SCAN TO E MAIL is selected in scan mode to scan the original in the Full color mode or the Gray scale mode The image quality or file size in Slim PDF may be more affected than in JPEG or PDF depending on the environment original placing direction when the original is scanned In addition the scanning will be slowed down Slim PDF is not suitable for the following originals It is recommended to scan them in JPEG or PDF Originals blurred when scanned in JPEG or PDF If the original is scanned in Slim PDF the image quality may be further diminished Complicated originals such as tables or maps containing lines or small sized text Originals where stable image quality is required such as critical documents i I 1 When scanning the original press the SLIM PDF button on the Control Panel After adjusting the original in Slim PDF scan the original and check the scanned in image quality If the image quality adjustment in Slim PDF is necessary use the next procedure lI M 2 Adjust the image quality in Slim PDF at a user s request To reduce the blurred area of text and photos Use steps a to b to perform the adjustment a Turn the original and place it Or when scanning the original press the COMMON SETTING
69. the D button to increase the copy density After increasing the copy density copy and check the copy image quality With the copy density set to the maximum if further image quality adjustments are still necessary use the next procedure I 2 Press the IMAGE button on the Control Panel Press the SHARPNESS button Press the SHARP button to increase the sharpness intensity After increasing the sharpness intensity copy and check the copy image quality With the sharpness intensity set to the maximum if further image quality adjustments are still necessary the service technician must use the following procedure I 3 Enter adjustment mode 05 Increase the values for codes 1737 1738 1757 and 7807 to make the copied text darker the sharpness level increases In the adjustment mode 05 original modes that allow the adjustment of the sharpness level for the Auto Color mode is only the TEXT PHOTO mode and the TEXT mode Set a value larger than 128 for each code Recommended Acceptable value value range Original mode 05 code Default Text Photo 05 1737 Text 05 1738 ACS Black Set a value larger than Text Photo ae 128 ACS Black Text 0 to 255 05 7807 Setting 0 provides the softest image while setting 255 provides the sharpest image Changing the values for these codes will change the sharpness intensity when the Sharpness indicator in the IMAGE me
70. the File Size Before the adjustment After the adjustment TOSHIBA When LOW is from among the When HIGH is from among the compression rate options the file size will compression rate options the file size will become larger than required be reduced Q Explanation When an original is scanned in the Full color or the Gray scale mode and stored in the e Filing box Scan to Box it will be compressed into JPEG format The data compression rate can be selected on a job by job basis The file size significantly varies depending on the selected data compression rate When LOW is selected from among the compression rate options the file size will be 2 to 3 times larger than the one when HIGH is selected When storing the original if a higher priority is given to file size reduction than the image quality change the compression rate Please remember that the e Filing functions are available only on the Windows platform and not on the Macintosh or UNIX platform This adjustment will have an effect on images stored using Scan to File and Scan to E mail Q Procedures Both the service technician and the user can perform all adjustments e STUDIO5520C 6520C 6530C O 2008 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved 4 8 4 e Filing specific Adjustments Scan to Box This adjustment will have an effect only on images JPEG format stored in the Full color mode including the Auto
71. the compression rate scan the original and check the scanned in image quality If further image quality adjustments are still necessary use other procedures e STUDIO5520C 6520C 6530C 2008 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved 5 8 5 Scanning specific Adjustments Mi W 4 When scanning the original press the COMMON SETTING button on the Control Panel Press the BACKGROUND ADJUSTMENT button Press the button to decrease the background density Then select HIGH from among the compression rate options This adjustment will be effective only if the original with a color background such as a newspaper and color paper is scanned This adjustment will have an effect only on the image scanned in the Full color mode including the Auto color mode or the Gray scale mode After decreasing the background density and changing the compression rate scan the original and check the scanned in image quality With the background density set to the minimum if further image quality adjustments are still necessary use other procedures UIN 5 Enter the setting mode 08 Change the value for the code 8304 to change the JPEG compression ratio Recommended Acceptable value range value Compression Default ratio 08 code Subcode Set a value smaller than 128 for higher compression ratio High quality Standard 08 8304 Set a value larger than 128 for lower compression ratio
72. the power of the equipment is turned ON to PRINTED IMAGE Setting value of 08 585 0 Text Photo Default Text Printed image Original mode at power ON Map Custom 1 2 3 Photo 4 5 Q Caution after the adjustment The new default original mode in the copying function will be applied to all types of originals scanned with the default setting of the Full color mode Therefore perform the adjustment carefully while checking the copied images other than the one used as a reference of the adjustment e STUDIO5520C 6520C 6530C O 2008 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION AII rights reserved 4 6 4 e Filing specific Adjustments 4 4 To Match the Color Balance on the Original To adjust the color balance in Print to Box Before the adjustment After the adjustment Print to Box l Print to Box e Filing box Image Quality Type e Filing box Image Quality Type Photograph General Stored Stored l Downloaded Client PC Client PC Displayed on the Displayed on the computer monitor computer monitor The image stored in the e Filing box looks The color balance of the image stored 1s closely different in the color balance from the original matched with that of the original e STUDIO5520C 6520C 6530C 2008 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved 4 7 4 e Filing specific Adjustments U Explanation If a full color image is printed on a client PC and stored in the e Filing box Print to Box it w
73. the table below and set the subcode for the area to be adjusted Subcode Area where the density is adjusted Low density area Medium density area High density area After setting the values copy and check the copy image quality Only if the vividness of R Red is still insufficient even after all the above procedures have been used must the service technician use the next procedure e STUDIO5520C 6520C 6530C 2008 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved 2 20 2 Copier specific Adjustments HI D 5 Enter adjustment mode 05 Change the value for code 2905 to adjust the transfer 1st transfer roller bias output Adjust the offset voltage of transfer roller bias for C Cyan and K Black so as to increase the density of R Red The code to use varies depending on the paper type and color to adjust Adjust the value for the subcode corresponding to the color for which you would like to improve the image quality Set the value within a range of 2 to 5 to obtain the highest density of R Red Color to adjust C Cyan K Black C Cyan K Black Recommended Acceptable Default value value range 05 code Subcode Paper type Plain paper 05 2905 2 to5 0 to 10 Thick Never change the values for subcodes other than the above Otherwise it may cause a loss in MFP performance including degradation in the image quality Note
74. the values for codes 1630 to 1633 to adjust the maximum color density of text Acceptable value range Color to adjust 05 code Recommended value Default Y Yellow M Magenta C Cyan K Black 05 1630 Set a value larger than 5 to 05 1631 increase the density 05 1632 Set a value smaller than 5 to decrease the density 05 1633 Set the value in increment of 1 while checking the copy image until the optimum value is obtained After adjusting the maximum color density of the text copy and check the copy image quality If further image quality adjustments are still necessary use the next procedure UIN 5 Enter adjustment mode 05 Change the values for codes 1725 and 7841 to adjust the level of reproducibility in the Text Photo mode or the User custom mode Recommended Default value Color mode Original mode 05 code Text Photo 05 1725 Set a value smaller than User custom 05 7841 3 Full color Set the value in increment of 1 while checking the copy image until the optimum value is obtained First set 3 for this code and check the copy image If further image quality improvements are still necessary set 2 If even further improvements are still necessary set 1 for this code Remember that if a value larger than 3 is set the edges of the image are enhanced attaching importance to the reproducibility of text The table bel
75. to the MFP After the adjustment the values changed will be applied to all printouts for the Halftone option For instance if the value for 05 code for PCL and Detail is changed it will be applied to printing performed with PCL6 and Halftone Detail or Auto selected Carefully perform the adjustment being aware that the image quality of all future printouts will be changed when printing out originals other than the one that is used for the adjustment When Mono is selected from among the Color options and Auto default is selected from among the Halftone options Detail of the Halftone options is applied to text and graphics illustrations and Smooth is applied to raster data images Therefore particular attention is required since the adjustment may have a different impact according to the patterns of the image to be printed Q Caution after the adjustment Nothing in particular e STUDIO5520C 6520C 6530C 2008 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved 3 65 3 Printer specific Adjustments 3 16 To Clearly Print Thin Lines Double Lines Before the adjustment After the adjustment p Conglomerate Group s PRTR data Conglomerate Group s PRTR data Ursa Major Operations Conglomerate Corp Ursa Major Operations Conglomerate Corp 1 Zinc water solub le compounds Zinc water soluble compounds 16 _ 2 aminoethanol 2 aminoethanol 43 Ethylene glycol Ethylene glycol
76. use procedure 1 Only the service technician must use procedures 2 to 4 Wi 1 Press the IMAGE button on the Control Panel Press the BACKGROUND ADJUSTMENT button Press the LIGHT button to decrease the background density After decreasing the background density copy and check the image quality With the background density set to the minimum if further image quality adjustments are still necessary the service technician must use the next procedure E 2 Enter adjustment mode 05 Change the values for codes 7033 7034 7041 to 7044 7048 and 7049 to adjust the density level of the background Recommended value Adjustment Original mode 05 code Default Text Photo 05 7041 Manual density Text 05 7042 adjustment Photo 05 7048 Image smoothing 05 7049 Set a value smaller Text Photo 05 7033 than 128 Text 05 7034 Photo 05 7043 Image smoothing 05 7044 Manual adjustment Set the value in increments of approximately 25 while checking the copy image until the optimum value is obtained After adjusting the background density copy and check the copy image quality If further image quality adjustments are still necessary use the next procedure 3 Enter adjustment mode 05 Change the values for codes 590 to 592 to adjust the gamma balance in each of low and medium density areas Original mode Text Photo 05 590 0 1 Text 05 591 0
77. user has requested erased too much or not erased at all depending on the type of the original Also the area to be erased may change depending on the orientation of the original Therefore adjust it carefully while checking the copy image e STUDIO5520C 6520C 6530C 2008 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved 2 82 2 Copier specific Adjustments 2 20 To Avoid Copying Blank Page of Original Scanned with RADF Before the adjustment After the adjustment Excursions s 2 ERN n When the original is scanned with the RADF The blank pages are omitted blank pages included in the original are also copied Q Explanation When the original is scanned with the RADF blank pages included in the original are also copied To copy while omitting the blank pages automatically the Blank Omit Pages function must be set and its threshold for judging if the page is blank or not must be adjusted However colored originals with no text or images are not omitted even this adjustment was performed because they cannot be detected as blank pages with this function Target originals The back side of an original with dark images on its front side the dark images can be seen through the back side or an original with light color An original with only 3 letters in 10 5 pt an original that is omitted as a blank page with the de
78. value Adjustment Original mode 05 code Text Photo 05 7041 Manual density Text 05 7042 adjustment Photo 05 7048 Image smoothing 05 7049 Set a value smaller Text Photo 05 7033 than 128 Text 05 7034 Photo 05 7043 Image smoothing 05 7044 Manual adjustment Set the value in increments of approximately 25 while checking the copy image until the optimum value is obtained After adjusting the background density copy and check the copy image quality If further image quality adjustments are still necessary use the next procedure WB 4 Enter the adjustment mode 05 Change the values for codes 7286 and 7287 to make the range correction operation in the manual density mode fixed The code to be set differs depending on the original mode Text Photo or Text Select the 05 code for the target original mode and change the value to 0 Recommended Acceptable value value range 0 0 1 1 Original mode 05 code Default Text Photo 05 7286 Text 05 7287 Explanation for setting values Setting Range correction value operation 0 Fixed 1 Varied After adjusting the background peak copy and check the copy image quality If further image quality adjustments are still necessary use the next procedure e STUDIO5520C 6520C 6530C 2008 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved 2 33 2 Copier specific Adjustments M 5 Enter ad
79. values for codes 8042 to 8065 or 8268 to 8275 to adjust the color density Adjust the value for 05 code corresponding to the print option to be applied PDL and Halftone Ex When printing on Windows is performed with the following options selected PCL6 Image Quality Type General Halftone Auto gt Text area Graphic and image area Change the values of Smooth for Y 05 8058 M 05 8059 C 05 0860 and K 05 8061 When printing on Macintosh is performed with the following option selected Image Type Photograph Halftone Smooth gt Change the values for Y 05 8050 M 05 8051 C 05 8052 and K 05 8053 Printing on Macintosh is performed in PostScript See the PS3 row in the table below Acceptable value range Color to adjust POE Halftone 05 code Subcode Recommended value Smooth 05 8058 0 1 2 Detail 05 8062 0 1 2 PS3 Smooth 05 8050 0 1 2 Y 600dpi Detail 05 8054 0 1 2 Yellow PS3 Smooth 05 8268 0 1 2 1200dpi Detail 05 8272 0 1 2 XPS Smooth 05 8042 0 1 2 Detail 05 8046 0 1 2 Smooth 05 8059 0 1 2 Detail 05 8063 0 1 2 PS3 Smooth 05 8051 0 1 2 600dpi Detail 05 8055 0 1 2 PS3 Smooth 05 8269 0 1 2 1200dpi Detail 05 8273 0 1 2 XPS Smooth 05 8043 0 1 2 Detail 05 8047 0 1 2 Smooth 05 8060 0 1 2 Detail 05 8064 0 1 2 PS3 Smooth 05 8052 0 1 2 600dpi Detail 05 8056 0 1 2 PS3 Smooth 05 8270 0 1 2 1200dpi Detail 05 8274 0 1 2 Smooth 05 8044
80. 0dpi compression rate MID in JPEG format Q Procedures The procedure to use varies depending on whether to reduce the file size by changing the options when scanning the original or in Slim PDF Refer to To Reduce the File Size by Changing the Options when Scanning the Original in order to reduce the file size without changing the file format Refer to To Reduce the File Size in Slim PDF in order to give a higher priority to the file size reduction than the image quality e STUDIO5520C 6520C 6530C 2008 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved 5 Scanning specific Adjustments 5 4 1 To Reduce the File Size by Changing the Options when Scanning the Original You can start with any of the procedures But it is recommended to perform the procedures in order as listed below You can use one procedure in conjunction with another But if this changes the image quality more than required or loses the effectiveness of the adjustment restore the settings made in the previously used procedure to the original ones Then use other procedures Both the service technician and the user can use this procedure However step 5 in the procedure must be performed only by the service technician mE o EL 0 mP e When scanning the original press the COMMON SETTING button on the Control Panel Select a lower resolution in the resolution option 200 dpi is selected from among th
81. 1 Set a value smaller than 128 0 to 255 128 Photo 05 592 0 1 Set the value in increments of approximately 20 while checking the copy image until the optimum value is obtained Acceptable Default value range 05 code Subcode Recommended value e STUDIO5520C 6520C 6530C 2008 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved 2 26 2 Copier specific Adjustments The subcode varies according to the area where the density is adjusted Refer to the table below and set the subcode for the area to be adjusted The background density will vary if the low or medium density area is mainly adjusted Setting 2 for the subcode allows you to adjust the high density area But it will not affect the background density Therefore never change the value for the high density area Subcode Area where the density is adjusted 0 Low density area 1 Medium density area After adjusting the gamma curve balance copy and check the copy image quality If further image quality adjustments are still necessary use the next procedure E 4 Enter the adjustment mode 05 Change the values for codes 7286 and 7287 to set the range correction operation in the manual density mode fixed The code to be set differs depending on the original mode Text Photo or Text Select the 05 code for the target original mode and change the value to 0 Recommended Acceptable value value range 0 0 1 1 Default
82. 10 4 x 10 5x Color Settings 1 gt Pure Black and Gray Printer TOSHIBA e STUDIO6530C ie A Presets Standard Hd Color Settings 1 Color Type Color E Resolution 600 dpi HH Halftone Auto M Distinguish Thin Lines Cl Toner Save Image Type General Pure Black and Gray Black Auto Black Over Print Text and Graphics o PDFv Preview Cancel C Print Q Caution after the adjustment The adjustment allows gray areas always to be reproduced using all color toners C M Y and K As a result undesired colors may look blended depending on the print image Therefore carefully perform the adjustment while checking the printouts e STUDIO5520C 6520C 6530C 2008 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved 3 19 3 Printer specific Adjustments 3 6 To Use Only the Black Toner to Reproduce Gray Areas To use only the black toner to reproduce black and white photos or gradational images Before the adjustment After the adjustment Photo area Photo area Text area t mg f Text area TOSHIBA Using all color toners to reproduce black and Using only the black toner to reproduce black white photo images bitmap data blends and white photo images can diminish undesired undesired colors in the image colors Q Explanation For printing only the K toner is usually used to reproduce gray a
83. 520C 6520C 6530C 2008 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved 4 16 4 e Filing specific Adjustments 4 9 Appendix Perform the e Filing setting according to the input and output methods of the data Purpose Input method Output method To scan black images more clearly in the Auto color mode Scan to Box Displaying on a computer monitor To scan an original while reducing its file size Scan to Box Displaying on a computer monitor To scan color photos while avoiding Moir Copy to Box Displaying on a computer monitor To match the color balance of the scanned image to that of the original Print to Box Displaying on a computer monitor To scan and print originals while avoiding Moir Scan to Box Printing on paper To print images stored in e Filing boxes more clearly Copy to Box Print to Box Printing on paper To scan images optimal for image processing or to be displayed on a computer monitor Scan to Box Displaying on a computer monitor e STUDIO5520C 6520C 6530C To print color images stored with the scanning function more clearly 4 17 Scan to Box Printing on paper 2008 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e STUDIO5520C 6520C 6530C 2008 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved 4 18 5 Scanning specific Adjustments 5 1 To Clearly Scan Text To reduce noise around text Before the adjust
84. 63 Xylene ES Xylene 69 Chromium Vl compounds Chromium Vl compounds _227 Toluene Toluene 230 Lead and its compounds al Lead and its compounds 243 Barium and its w ater solub le compounds Barium and its w ater solub le compounds 283 Hydrogen fluor ide and its water soluble salts Hydrogen fluor ide and its water solub le salts __304 Boron and its compounds Boron and its compounds 346 Molybdenum and its compounds Molybden um and its compounds Thin lines or double lines are dotted on the The thin lines or double lines are clearly printout printed out Q Explanation When thin lines or double lines which are laid out on a solid filled area are printed out they may be dotted on the printout Change the option on the printer driver setting for emphasizing thin lines in order to clearly print them out Q Procedures Follow the procedure below to perform the adjustment However the service technician shall judge whether or not the adjustment is to be performed in conjunction with the printer driver setting in step 1 and the 08 code setting in step 4 after checking the printed image Both the service technician and the user can use procedure 1 Only the service technician must use procedures 2 3 and 4 e STUDIO5520C 6520C 6530C 2008 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved 3 66 3 Printer specific Adjustments E 1
85. A blank page is ignored for printing Q Explanation Some applications may be designed to automatically insert blank pages for laying out the pages of a document Change the option on the printer driver in order to ignore all blank pages for printing Q Procedures Both the service technician and the user can perform all adjustments e STUDIO5520C 6520C 6530C 2008 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved 3 79 3 Printer specific Adjustments BW 1 Enable the Do not Print Blank Pages option on the printer driver For Windows PcLe PS3 xPs j Open the property page of the printer driver Mark the Do not Print Blank Pages checkbox in the Others tab TOSHIBA e STUDIO6530CSeries PS3 Printing Preferences Basic Finishing Paper Handling Image Quality Effect Others Print Job Default Menu Setting Normal Print d TE asic M Toner Save M Do not Print Blank Pages Letterhead Print Mode Custom Paper Size PostScript Settings Letter LES E Graphics Tet Department E Profile Custom Settings File Import Export None Save Profile Delete Version Information Restore Defaults Restore All Defaults e STUDIO5520C 6520C 6530C 2008 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved 3 80 3 Printer specific Adjustments For Macintosh Open the print dialog box Enable the Do not Print Blank Pages op
86. Acceptable Default Original mode 05 code 9 05 value range value Set a value larger than 0to4 2 User custom 05 925 2 Note Ifthe setting value is too large the life of consumables may be shortened To adjust copy density a Enter the adjustment mode 05 Change the value for the codes 931 and 940 to adjust the copy density The larger the setting value is the darker the image becomes The smaller the setting value is the lighter the image becomes Base original Density mode 05 code Recommended value mode Set a value smaller than Default 128 to make the image Automatic darker 0 to 255 Text Photo Manual Set a value larger than 128 to make the image lighter 2008 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e STUDIO5520C 6520C 6530C 2 75 2 Copier specific Adjustments To adjust the changing amount of ACS ADJUSTMENT indicator a Enter the adjustment mode 05 Change the values for codes 934 and 937 to adjust the changing amount of the ACS ADJUSTMENT indicator per step for the manual density mode The larger the setting value is the larger the changing amount per step becomes The smaller the setting value is the smaller the changing amount per step becomes Base Moving original direction in 05 code Recommended value Default mode indicator Set a value smaller than 20 to Light step make the changing amount smaller Text Photo
87. Adjustments 4 6 To Finely Print the Image Stored in the e Filing box To print images stored through Copy to Box or Print to Box Before the adjustment Copy to Box Print to Box Print data e Filing box Print data Copy to Box Print to Box Stored Downloaded l Converted into RGB Stored Client PC Stored Print Print data Converted into print data again If the image stored in the e Filing box is If the image is printed out directly from the e downloaded to a PC and then printed out the Filing box the image quality will be image data conversion may diminish the image maintained quality e STUDIO5520C 6520C 6530C 2008 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved 4 e Filing specific Adjustments Q Explanation Initially the original is copied or printed and stored in the e Filing box Copy to Box or Print to Box as CMYK data or optimized for printing on paper While it is being downloaded to a client PC using File Downloader or the TWAIN driver it is converted into RGB data or optimized for displaying on the computer monitor RGB data are not suitable for printing on paper Therefore if printed out the image quality may be diminished Therefore it should be printed out directly from the e Filing box rather than downloaded to the PC in order to obtain a fine printout Please remember that the e Filing functions are available only on the Windows platform and not on the Macintos
88. C 6520C 6530C 2008 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved 2 15 2 Copier specific Adjustments 2 3 To Improve the Reproducibility of Gray Before the adjustment After the adjustment Another color M is blended in the gray area No undesired color is blended A clear copy image is obtained Q Explanation When an original containing gray is copied another color may be blended in the gray area Perform image quality control automatic calibration color adjustment color balance adjustment or RGB adjustment and color density adjustment in order to avoid this problem or to obtain an achromatic color for instance Q Procedures You can start with any of the procedures But it is recommended to perform the procedures in order as listed below You can use one procedure in conjunction with another But if this changes the image quality more than required or loses the effectiveness of the adjustment restore the settings made in the previously used procedure to the original ones Then use other procedures Both the service technician and the user can use procedures 1 and 2 Only the service technician must use procedure 3 I P 1 Perform automatic calibration to correct variations in the copy density For further information regarding the adjustment procedures refer to procedure 1 in 2 2 To Closely Match the Color Balance of the Original ADMIN is selected from among the CA
89. C E County D County A Mi County B lll County C Hi County D The dark toner comes off The dark toner is securely fixed Q Explanation When highly colored lines where a large accumulated amount of C M Y and K toners are used are created on raster data image such as BMP GIF JPEG and TIFF and printed on the rough surface of paper or thick paper the toner may come off the paper This is because the C M Y and K toners may be overlaid the paper may be extremely thick or the surface may be rough and the amount of toner used may be insufficient Adjust the limit value of the maximum amount of toner used in order to avoid a toner fixing problem This adjustment does not affect a single color of C M Y and K or bright colors such as red and green e STUDIO5520C 6520C 6530C 2008 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved 3 92 3 Printer specific Adjustments Q Procedures The service technician must perform all adjustments PcLe PS3 xes EED This adjustment will have an effect only on Auto or Color mode printing HI 1 Enter adjustment mode 05 Decrease the values for codes 8070 8071 or 8089 8090 to reduce the limit value of the maximum amount of toner used Adjust the value for 05 code corresponding to the print option to be applied Paper type and Halftone Printing on Macintosh is performed in PostScript See the PS3 row in the table below Resolution 05 code Subcode Kaa f oe E v
90. CORPORATION All rights reserved 3 64 3 Printer specific Adjustments PCL6 PS3 XPS Mac This adjustment will have an effect only on Black and white mode printing 4 Increase the values for codes 7315 to 7320 or 7309 to 7310 to adjust the gamma curve balance and increase the Low Medium density on Black and White mode printing Adjust the value for 05 code corresponding to the print option to be applied PDL and Halftone Printing on Macintosh is performed in PostScript See the PS3 row in the table below Acceptable Default value range PDL Halftone 05 code Subcode Recommended value PS3 Smooth 05 7315 0 1 2 600dpi Detail 05 7316 0 1 2 PS3 Smooth 05 7309 0 1 2 1200dpi Detail 05 7310 0 1 2 Smooth 05 7317 0 1 2 inii Detail 05 7318 0 1 2 Smooth 05 7319 0 1 2 Detail 05 7320 0 1 2 Set a value larger than 128 0 to 255 XPS Set the value in increments of approximately 10 while checking the printouts until the optimum value is obtained The subcode varies according to the area where the density is adjusted Refer to the table below and set the subcode for the area to be adjusted Subcode Area where the density is adjusted Low density area Medium density area High density area Note e This adjustment changes the values set in the MFP Therefore it will affect every user who uses the printer by connecting it
91. Color settings 1 gt Halftone 10 3 x 10 4 x 10 5x Color Settings 1 gt Image Type Halftone Set either of the following options in accordance with the type of original to print mage Type Presentation To make color darker Halftone Detail To make the halftone screen high frequency Printer TOSHIBA e STUDIO6530C a e Presets Standard H4 Color Settings 1 Es Color Type Color Resolution 600 dpi FH Halftone Detail M Distinguish Thin Lines f Toner Save Image Type Presentation Black Over Print Text and Graphics HH Pure Black and Gray Black and Gray Auto o PDFv Preview Cancel Print e STUDIO5520C 6520C 6530C 2008 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved 3 49 Image Type Line Art To make the color darker and enhance thin lines Halftone Auto or Detail To make the halftone screen high frequency Printer TOSHIBA e STUDIO6530C eA Presets Color Settings 1 Color Type Resolution error M Distinguish Thin Lines 1 Toner Save Image Type Black Over Print Pure Black and Gray Crore Crreview Text and Graphics Black and Gray Auto After changing the options on the printer driver print and check the print image quality If further image quality adjustments are still necess
92. D 2 out of registration colors Jot down the paper feeding direction on the printed test print pattern beforehand This facilitates identifying out of registration colors in the subsequent adjustment Use only the second page of the test print pattern e STUDIO5520C 6520C 6530C 2008 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved 1 21 1 General Adjustments Copying Printing and e Filing Output from Box 4 Check the second page of the printed test print pattern to identify a pattern for the out of registration colors There are 2 patterns for the out of registration colors Check which pattern the out of registration colors to adjust on the body are included Pattern A for out of registration colors Patch eliminated at Patch eliminated the leading edge trailing edge pU eh H r ot Page number d Paper feeding direction Black belt at the leading edge in the paper feeding direction Pattern B for out of registration colors Patch eliminated at Patch eliminated at the trailing edge the leading edge pex e E Paper feeding direction e STUDIO5520C 6520C 6530C 1 22 Paper feeding speed slower than transfer belt rotating speed Paper feeding speed faster than transfer belt rotating speed 2008 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved 1 General Adjustments Copying Printing and e Filing Output from Box 5 Finely adjust the rotating speed of t
93. F 2 70 To Program Frequently Used Copy Settings To Use Custom Mode 2 73 2 18 1 To Adjust Custom Mode Settings in Black Mode 2 73 2 18 2 To Adjust Custom Mode Settings in Color Mode 2 78 To Copy While Erasing Shadow Outside of Image 2 82 To Avoid Copying Blank Page of Original Scanned with RADF 2 83 To Obtain Image in Even Density Level 2 85 3 Printer specific Adjustments Restrictions on Use of Printer Functions 3 1 3 1 To Maintain a Steady Color Balance 3 2 3 2 To Maintain a Steady Color Balance on Thick Paper or Special Paper 3 4 3 3 To Obtain the Desired Color Balance sseeeessseeseeeeeeeennrne 3 6 3 4 To Closely Match the Color Balance on the Monitor 3 14 3 5 To Maintain a Uniform Gray Hue 3 6 3 7 3 8 3 9 3 10 3 11 3 12 3 13 3 14 3 15 3 16 3 17 3 18 3 19 To maintain Consistency in Gray among Text Photos and Graphics 3 17 To Use Only the Black Toner to Reproduce Gray Areas To use only the black toner to reproduce black and white photos or gradatonal IMAGES 3 20 To Easily Adjust the Overall Brightness neee 3 24 To Adjust the Overall Saturation
94. GE button on the Control Panel Press the ONE TOUCH ADJUSTMENT button Press the MARKER button After selecting the Marker option copy and check the copy image quality When the copy image quality with the Marker option is insufficient cancel the Marker option and use the next procedure The one touch adjustment can be canceled by pressing the ONE TOUCH ADJUSTMENT button again M 2 Enter adjustment mode 05 Change the value for code 1769 to adjust the tint of colors in Marker mode 05 code Subcode Acceptable value range Default 05 1769 0to5 0to 6 3 Set the value in increments of approximately 1 while checking the copy image until the optimum value is obtained The subcode varies according to the color where the adjustment is performed Refer to the table below and set the subcode for the color to be adjusted Subcode Color to adjust 0 Y Yellow M Magenta C Cyan R Red G Green B Blue Setting a value larger than the default value moves the hue of the color selected to as shown below On the other hand setting a value smaller than the default value moves it to For instance set 6 for R Red Then the tint of the red is closely matched with that of Y Yellow Set 0 for R Red Then the tint of the red will be closely matched with that of M Magenta After adjusting the hue copy and check the copy image quality If further image quality adj
95. HIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved 2 86 3 Printer specific Adjustments Restrictions on Use of Printer Functions When this MFP is being used as a printer printer functions available differ depending on the color or resolution settings See the table below for the relation between color or resolution settings and printer functions available 600dpi 1200dpi PS3 only Printer functions Auto Redi Auto Twin Black and Color Color Color Color White Image Quality Type mem 7 7 mew AE PE AE VE HE Imswmm Y _ __ Bien E EM A E Advanced Image Quality Basic ue O 7 2 7 EU ee eroe PS E E Distinguish Thin Lines Image Quality Color Balance Image Attribute essaie TT 7 75 T L I ee E ET A PR 2 E Use Sharpness Filter Y Others masse 7 7 L eR Aa Applicable only to PS3 and XPS printer drivers 2 Applicable only to a PS3 printer driver 3 Applicable only to black K lt Hint gt The resolution level 1200 dpi is suitable for cases such as When printing thin lines e g in a graph clearly 7 3 16 To Clearly Print Thin Lines Double Lines When suppressing jagged diagonal lines 7 3 14 To Clearly Print Light Colored Thin Lines or Text 600 dpi is recommended for images such as photographs or design drawings that require emphasis on colors or gradations e STUDIO5520C 6520C 6530C 2008 TOSHIBA
96. Help Ps3 X xPS WI 5 Uncheck Use Sharpness Filter on the Image Attribute tab menu Setting Basic ColorBalance Image Attribute Advanced Contrast 4 4 F Ki E Brightness p 4 4 Background Adjustment 4 7 f EJ 23 Saturation 4 P 4 Use Sharpness Filter 4 4 Restore Defaults Cancel Help e STUDIO5520C 6520C 6530C 2008 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved 3 109 3 Printer specific Adjustments Bl 6 Select None on the CMYK Source Profile option on the Advanced tab menu At this step you can set any printer profile Setting Basic Color Balance Image Attribute Advanced Source Profiles RGB Source Profile 9 ScuceRGB v10 oe CMYK Source Profile oe SourceCMYK v10 X l None i SourceCMYK v10 Destination Profile X Profile OutputCMYK_v10 v r Rendering Intent Perceptual Relative Colorimetric C Saturation C Absolute Colorimetric Restore Defaults Cancel Help Ps3 _ xPS El 7 Uncheck Apply to Device Color Only Setting Basic Color Balance Image Attribute Advanced Source Profiles RGB Source Profile SouceRGB v10 X e CMYK Source Profile be None x Apply to Device Color Only Destination Profile Profile ce OutputCMYK v10 Rendering Intent C Perceptual Relative Colorim
97. ION All rights reserved 3 21 3 Printer specific Adjustments For Macintosh Mac This adjustment will have an effect only on full color printing Open the print dialog box Select Black amp Gray Text Graphic amp Image from among the Pure Black and Gray options The menu to select varies according to the operating system Refer to the table below and select the menu OS Menu 10 2 x Printer Features gt Feature Sets Color settings 2 gt Pure Black and Gray 10 3 x 10 4 x 10 5x Color Settings 1 Pure Black and Gray Printer TOSHIBA e STUDIO6530C HJ ER Presets Standard FH Color Settings 1 W Color Type Color d E Resolution 600 dpi Halftone Auto EZ M Distinguish Thin Lines f Toner Save Image Type General EX Black Over Print Text and Graphics Pure Black and Gray Black and Gray Text Graphic and 4 PDF Preview Cancel Print Q Caution after the adjustment The adjustment allows gray areas to always be reproduced using only the K toner As a result color photos may look more grained Therefore carefully perform the adjustment while checking the printouts e STUDIO5520C 6520C 6530C 2008 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved 3 22 3 Printer specific Adjustments 2 Enter the adjustment mode 05 Change the values for codes
98. LIBRATION DISPLAY LEVEL options by default In other words an administrator is authorized to operate automatic calibration But the USER option can also be selected to allow the user to operate it Refer to the User Functions Guide for further information regarding how to select the CALIBRATION DISPLAY LEVEL option After performing automatic calibration copy and check the copy image quality If further image quality adjustments are still necessary use the next procedure e STUDIO5520C 6520C 6530C 2008 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved 2 16 2 Copier specific Adjustments IB 2 Perform color balance adjustment or RGB adjustment to adjust the tint of colors in general For further information regarding the adjustment procedures refer to procedure 3 in 2 2 To Closely Match the Color Balance of the Original After adjusting the tint of colors copy and check the copy image quality If further image quality adjustments are still necessary use the next procedure IB 1 3 Enter adjustment mode 05 Change the values for codes 1779 to 1798 to adjust the color density Color to adjust Acceptable Default value range Original mode 05 code Subcode Recommended value Text Photo 05 1779 0 1 2 Text 05 1780 0 1 2 Printed image 05 1781 0 1 2 Photo 05 1782 0 1 2 Map 05 1783 0 1 2 Text Photo 05 1784 0 1 2 Text 05 1785 0 1 2 M Printed i 05 1786 0 1 2 Magenta EE eU 05 1787 0 12 Set a value larger t
99. Letter E E Graphics Text r Profile None gt Save Profile Restore Defaults menu Setting Basic Color Balance Image Attribute Advanced Source Profiles RGB Source Profile SouceRGB v10 bd e CMYK Source Profile a ourceCMYK_v10 bd IV Apply to Device Color Only Bl 4 Select the uploaded profile on RGB Source Profile or CMYK Source Profile on the Advanced tab Destination Profile 4 Profile OutputCMYK_v10 LA r Rendering Intent C Perceptual Relative Colorimetric C Saturation Absolute Colorimetric Restore Defaults e STUDIO5520C 6520C 6530C Update Now 3 122 2008 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved 3 Printer specific Adjustments El 5 Uncheck Apply to Device Color Only Setting Basic Color Balance Image Attribute Advanced Source Profiles RGB Source Profile 9 ScuceRGB v10 CMYK Source Profile SouceCMYK_vi0 z I Apply to Device Color Only Destination Profile Profile 1 OutputCMYK_v10 Rendering Intent C Perceptual Relative Colorimetric Saturation Absolute Colorimetric Restore Defaults Update Now Bl 6 Select the uploaded printer profile on Profile of the Destination Profile option Setting Basic Color Balance Image Attribute Advanced Source Profiles
100. M Distinguish Thin Lines 1 Toner Save Image Type General E Black Over Print Text and Graphics H4 Pure Black and Gray Black Text Graphic and Image PDF Preview Cancel C Print After changing the option on the printer driver print and check the print image quality If further image quality adjustments are still necessary use the next procedure e STUDIO5520C 6520C 6530C 2008 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved 3 84 3 Printer specific Adjustments Bl 3 Open the property page of the printer driver Press the Setting button in the Image Quality tab Mark the Use Black for All Text checkbox in the Image Quality tab This adjustment will have an effect only on printing on a Windows PCL6 or PS3 or XPS emulation printer driver This adjustment cannot be performed on a Macintosh printer driver This adjustment will be effective only if a file created on a general application such as Microsoft Office is printed in PostScript PS3 It may not be effective if a file created on a graphic application e g Illustrator or a DTP application e g QuarkXPress is printed or a PDF file created on these applications is printed Setting Basic Color Balance Image Attribute Custom Color Settings r Halftone Resolution Auto 600dpi Distinguish Thin Lines IV Pure Black Apply to JV Pure Gray Auto z Apply to
101. OLOR will become larger Acceptable Increase the set value to 8214 enlarge the black area l to 255 IE e STUDIO5520C 6520C 6530C 2008 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved 3 105 3 Printer specific Adjustments 3 25 To Use ICC Profile Q Explanation To interchange color images among several devices and reproduce precise color balance of the obtained images on each device ICC profiles are generally used This section introduces setting items that become available with the use of ICC profiles ICC profiles are available only for PS3 or XPS printer driver on Windows Note that Macintosh printer drivers do not support ICC profiles Q Procedures The setting procedure differs depending on how the user wants to use ICC profiles Follow the most suitable procedure referring to the subsections To Create ICC Profiles for Printing on the Paper to be Used To Print Precise Colors Using Existing RGB Source ICC Profiles To Perform Simulated Printing with CMYK Inks of Each Ink Manufacturer To Convert Colors with Specified Source ICC Profiles Not Using Embedded ICC Profiles or To Perform Further Adjustment After Using ICC Profiles according to the request from the user e STUDIO5520C 6520C 6530C 2008 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved 3 106 E 3 Printer specific Adjustments 3 25 1 To Create ICC Profiles for Printing on the Paper to be Used U Explanation To create a new printer profile to b
102. Others Print Job Default Menu Setting Normal Print X mi asic ae Do not Print Blank Pages Letterhead Print Mode Letter LIE LI Custom Paper Size PostScript Settings Graphics Tet Department Profile 3 Custom Settings File None gt Import Export Save Profle Dee _ Version information Restore Defaults Restore All Defaults e STUDIO5520C 6520C 6530C 3 72 2008 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved For Macintosh Open the print dialog box Enable the Toner Save option 3 Printer specific Adjustments The menu to select varies according to the operating system Refer to the table below and select the menu OS Menu 10 2 x Printer Features gt Printing Modes gt Toner Save 10 3 x 10 4 x 10 5x Color Settings 1 gt Toner Save Printer TOSHIBA e STUDIO6530C H Presets Standard FH Color Settings 1 6 Color Type Color E Resolution 600 dpi M Distinguish Thin Lines Halftone Auto Hd Image Type General Black Over Print Text and Graphics E Q Caution after the adjustment Pure Black and Gray Black and Gray Auto PDF v Preview Cancel Print The adjustment may possibly provide the image density lower than the user desi
103. PORATION All rights reserved 3 62 3 Printer specific Adjustments PcLe Ps3 JG This adjustment will have an effect only on Auto or Color mode printing HI 3 Enter adjustment mode 05 Increase the values for codes 8042 to 8065 or 8268 to 8275 to increase the Low Middle density of the color Adjust the value for 05 code corresponding to the print option to be applied PDL and Halftone Ex When printing on Windows is performed with the following options selected PCL6 Image Quality Type General Halftone Auto gt Text area graphic area and image area Change the values for Y 05 8058 M 05 8059 C 05 8060 and K 05 8061 When printing on Macintosh is performed with the following option selected Image Type Photograph Halftone Smooth gt Change the values for Y 05 8050 M 05 8051 C 05 8052 and K 05 8053 Printing on Macintosh is performed in PostScript See the PS3 row in the table below Color to adjust Acceptable value range PDL Halftone 05 code Subcode Recommended value Smooth 05 8058 0 1 Detail 05 8062 0 1 PS3 Smooth 05 8050 0 1 Y 600dpi Detail 05 8054 0 1 Yellow PS3 Smooth 05 8268 0 1 1200dpi Detail 05 8272 0 1 XPS Smooth 05 8042 0 1 Detail 05 8046 0 1 Smooth 05 8059 0 1 Detail 05 8063 0 1 PS3 Smooth 05 8051 0 1 600dpi Detail 05 8055 0 1 PS3 Smooth 05 8269 0 1 1200dpi Detail 05 8273 0 1 Smooth 05 8043 0 1 iis Detail 05 8047 0 1 Smoo
104. PS This adjustment will have an effect only on Auto or Color mode printing ll 3 Open the property page of the printer driver Press the Setting button in the Image Quality tab Mark the Detail checkbox in the Color Balance tab Press the Edit button Set the value for the Low Middle density of the color you would like to adjust within a range of 1 to 4 in the Color Balance Details option This adjustment will have an effect only on printing on the Windows PCL6 or PS3 emulation printer driver This adjustment cannot be performed on a Macintosh printer driver nitially set 4 and check the printout Color Balance Detail E Cyan BE Magenta Yellow Bg Black Restore Defaults Cancel After changing the option on the printer driver print and check the print image quality If further image quality adjustments are still necessary use the next procedure PCL6 PS3 J M 4 Enter adjustment mode 05 Adjust the color balance XPS_ Mac This adjustment will have an effect only on Auto or Color mode printing Use steps a to b to adjust the color balance a Enter adjustment mode 05 select code 396 and then press the START button Image quality control will be forcibly performed to correct variations in image contrast b Enter adjustment mode 05 Change the values for codes 8054 to 8057 8062 to 8065 8046 to 8049 or 8272 to 8275 to adjust the color
105. Procedures The service technician must perform all adjustments HI D 1 Enter adjustment mode 05 Change the values for codes 1075 to 1077 to adjust the black density of a scanned in image Color mode Original mode 05 code Recommended value Acceptable Default value range Text 05 1075 Full color Printed image 05 1076 Photo 05 1077 Set a value larger than 0 0to4 Setting 0 provides the lightest black while setting 4 the darkest Q Caution after the adjustment The adjustment may possibly provide the extremely dark background Therefore carefully perform the adjustment while checking the scanned in image e STUDIO5520C 6520C 6530C 5 16 2008 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved 5 Scanning specific Adjustments 5 7 To Scan an Original with the Desired Gradation Before the adjustment ATTE The image is scanned with natural gradation Default scanning After the adjustment After the adjustment RSEN DEMONSTRATIC Photo Mode Gradation is decreased Gradation is increased Q Explanation When an original is scanned in the Black mode or the Gray scale mode changing the scan density according to density area low medium or high density area allows a user to adjust the reproducibility of halftones gradation Adjust the gamma curve balance in order to change the gradation depending on the type of original
106. Quality Effect Others Original Paper Size Letter 8 1 2 x 11 M Print Paper Size Manual Scale Same as Original Size 100 25 400 Paper Source Auto X Paper Type Plain Auto M Number of Copies I 1 3999 Orientation A Portrait E C Landscape Twin Color e STUDIO5520C 6520C 6530C Cancel 2008 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved 3 98 For Macintosh 3 Printer specific Adjustments Open the print dialog box Select Twin color Black amp from among the Color Type options The menu to select varies according to the operating system Refer to the table below and select the menu OS Menu 10 2 x Printer Features gt Feature Sets Color settings 1 gt Color Type 10 3 x 10 4 x 10 5x Color Settings 1 gt Color Type Printer TOSHIBA e STUDIO6530C Presets Standard Color Type Resolution Halftone Cl Toner Save M Distinguish Thin Lines ve fu Color Settinas 1 Auto Color Black and Red Black and Green Black and Blue Black and Cyan Black and Magenta Black and Yellow Black and White Image Type Black Over Print Pure Black and Gray General Text and Graphics Black and Gray Auto SEE PDFW Preview Cancel After selecting these options prin
107. RATION All rights reserved 1 8 1 General Adjustments Copying Printing and e Filing Output from Box Q Caution after the adjustment The adjustment may possibly cause an increase in the amount of toner consumed scattering of the toner diminished photo images or gradations less accurate reproducibility of halftones extremely dark images decreased resolving power extremely light images faint thin lines and shorten the life of the consumables Therefore carefully perform the adjustment while checking the copy or print image No effect of the adjustment may appear depending on the operating environment of the MFP Therefore carefully perform the adjustment while checking the copy or print image Q Remarks The effect of the adjustment may vary depending on the usage pattern of the consumables such as the developer material and drum and the operating environment of the MFP When replacing any consumable refer to the relevant information in the Service Manual and Service Handbook e STUDIO5520C 6520C 6530C 2008 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved 1 9 1 General Adjustments Copying Printing and e Filing Output from Box 1 3 To Achieve the Image Quality Most Suitable for the Paper Used To eliminate blur and graininess from an image Before the adjustment After the adjustment The image looks grained depending on the A clear image quality most suitable for a type type of pa
108. T B 1__ Tuaction Automatic Exposure Control HOW MANY DINOSAURS The background color of the original is also The background color is eliminated allowing copied Therefore no clear contrast is made clear contrast between the background and text between the background and text Q Explanation When a full color original such as colored paper is copied its background color is also copied Therefore no clear contrast is made between the background and the text on the copy Perform background adjustment in order to copy an original with a highly colored background while eliminating the background color or making it white Q Procedures The procedure to use varies depending on whether to adjust the copy image quality in the Black mode or the Full color mode Refer to the procedure corresponding to the user s particular request e STUDIO5520C 6520C 6530C 2008 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved 2 25 2 Copier specific Adjustments 2 6 1 To Adjust the Copy Image Quality in the Black Mode You can start with any of the procedures But it is recommended to perform the procedures in order as listed below You can use one procedure in conjunction with another But if this changes the image quality more than required or loses the effectiveness of the adjustment restore the settings made in the previously used procedure to the original ones Then use other procedures Both the service technician and the user can
109. TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved 3 10 3 Printer specific Adjustments For Macintosh EED This adjustment will have an effect only on full color printing Open the print dialog box Change the Color Balance option the Brightness or Saturation option The menu to select varies according to the operating system Refer to the table below and select the menu Menu Printer Features gt Feature Sets Color settings 3 Color Balance 10 2 x Printer Features gt Feature Sets Color settings 4 gt Brightness or Saturation 10 3 x 10 4 x 10 5x Color Settings 2 gt Color Balance Brightness or Saturation nitially change the value by 4 steps while checking the printouts until the optimum value is obtained Printer TOSHIBA e STUDIO6530C we Presets Standard H4 Color Settings 2 HJ Color Balance Magenta Image Attribute Sharpness 0 2 PDFv C Preview Cancel Print After changing the option on the printer driver print and check the print image quality If further image quality adjustments are still necessary the service technician must use the next procedure e STUDIO5520C 6520C 6530C 2008 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved 3 11 3 Printer specific Adjustments Pss xes QED This adjustment will have an effect only on Auto or Color mode printing HI 3 Enter adjustment mode 05 Change the
110. TOSHIBA Leading Innovation gt gt E srupio5520c 6520c 6530c Satisfying Specific Customer Needs for Designed Image Quality Imaging Manual maintenance File No SME08000800 R080621G1100 TTEC VerOO 2008 11 Trademarks Fiery is a registered trademark of Electronics for Imaging Inc in the U S Patent and Trademark Office and or certain other foreign jurisdictions Company names and product names in this manual are the trademarks or registered trademarks of their respective companies 2008 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved Under the copyright laws this manual cannot be reproduced in any form without prior written permission of TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION No patent liability is assumed however with respect to the use of the information contained herein Revision Record File No SME08000800 Descriptions Remarks Purpose of the Imaging Manual The Imaging Manual is intended for customers using the Toshiba e STUDIO5520C 6520C 6530C with a variety of specific needs and inquiries for high image quality such as How to obtain a clearer copy image How to maintain the current image quality How to make the text look sharper on the copy The Toshiba MFPs are factory configured to provide image quality settings that satisfy the majority of customers However these settings may not be necessarily optimal for the specific needs of all customers Proper im
111. TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved 3 54 3 Printer specific Adjustments Pss GER This adjustment will have an effect only on Auto or Color mode printing HI 5 Enter adjustment mode 05 Increase the values for codes 8110 to 8113 to perform fine adjustment and increase the sharpness intensity Adjust the value for 05 code corresponding to the print option to be applied Color mode and Image quality type Acceptabl color Image 05 code Subcode Recommend e value mode quality type ed value General 05 8110 0 1 2 Auto Photograph 05 8111 0 1 2 Set a value 0 to 255 128 Color 05 8112 0 1 2 larger than 128 05 8113 0 1 2 Apply to Set the value in increments of approximately 5 while checking the printouts until the optimum value is obtained Hint This adjustment affects on the following areas according to Image Quality Type General Photograph and Presentation Only raster data print image Line Art Only thin lines small text and raster data Note This adjustment changes the values set in the MFP Therefore it will affect every user who uses the printer by connecting it to the MFP After the adjustment the values changed will be applied to all printouts for the Sharpness option Carefully perform the adjustment being aware that the image quality of all future printouts will be changed when printing out originals other than the one that is used for the adjustment When the s
112. Type Profile Name E i General Photograph Presentation Line Art Graphics Profile None Save Profile Restore Defaults BI 3 Select the desired type of halftone on the Halftone option on the Basic tab menu t is not recommended to select Auto on this option because several types of halftone may be used on the same page Setting Basic Color Balance Image Attribute Advanced Custom Color Settings Save Current Settings as Setting 1 Resolution 600dpi DISUTTIUIST TTIITETTES jw Pure Black Apply to FN Pure Gray Auto zl Apply to v Black Over Print Test amp Graphic x Restore Defaults e STUDIO5520C 6520C 6530C 2008 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved 3 108 3 Printer specific Adjustments Bl 4 Select the desired resolution level on the Resolution option 1200 dpi is selectable only for PS3 printer driver Setting Basic Color Balance Image Attribute Advanced Custom Color Settings I Save Current Settings as Name Setting 1 g IDE n Halftone Resolution E Smooth 600dpi X Use Black for All Text 1200dpi Distinguish Thin Lines IV Pure Black Apply to jv Pure Gray Auto z Apply to IV Black Over Print Text amp Graphic z Restore Defaults Cancel
113. a Set 1 value x 5 R H for code 08 570 to increase the frequency of image quality control in response to a change in humidity mage quality control will be performed when the relative humidity changes in accordance with the specified difference from the previous image quality control If the difference in the relative humidity exceeds the specified value image quality control is performed first Then a copy or print job will be performed Value for 08 570 Difference in relative humidity 1 5 R H 2 10 R H default b Set 5 or 3 for code 08 2508 to increase the frequency of image quality control in response to a change in humidity Image quality control will be performed when the drum temperature changes in accordance with the difference from the previous image quality control If the difference in the drum temperature exceeds the specified value after a print job is performed image quality control is performed Value for 08 2508 Difference in drum temperature 3 C 5 C 7 C default After setting the value for code 08 571 by procedure a or b forcibly perform image quality control as follows Enter adjustment mode 05 select code 396 and then press the START button e STUDIO5520C 6520C 6530C 2008 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved 1 16 1 General Adjustments Copying Printing and e Filing Output from Box To Have Uniform Variations in the Imag
114. ack and white original in the Gray scale mode Use steps a to d to select the IMAGE QUALITY FOR BLACK option a Press the USER FUNCTIONS button on the Control Panel to enter the User Functions menu b Press the USER tab c Press the SCAN button d Press the HIGH QUALITY button in the IMAGE QUALITY FOR BLACK option Q Caution after the adjustment All scanning functions are implemented with reference to the density and the IMAGE QUALITY FOR BLACK option They will affect the image quality of black and white originals stored in the Auto color mode Therefore carefully perform the adjustment being aware that the image quality of all future images will be changed when storing originals other than the one that is used for the adjustment Remarks If HIGH QUALITY is selected from among the IMAGE QUALITY FOR BLACK options and black and white originals are scanned in the Auto color mode and stored in the e Filing box Scan to Box this allows them to be stored in the Gray scale mode rather than in the binary mode and eventually provides better halftones The data will increase in size compared to those in the binary mode The adjustment of density will be effective only if STANDARD is selected from among the IMAGE QUALITY FOR BLACK options e STUDIO5520C 6520C 6530C 2008 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved 4 2 4 e Filing specific Adjustments 4 2 To Store an Original while Reducing
115. adjustment while checking the printout Unless this adjustment changes the density of R Red return the values to the default set value 5 This adjustment may affect not only the printouts but also every type of image quality such as the copy image Therefore perform the adjustment being aware that the image quality of all future printouts will be changed when printing out originals other than the one that is used for the adjustment Q Caution after the adjustment Nothing in particular Q Remarks The saturation adjustment does not affect black or gray areas on the printout e STUDIO5520C 6520C 6530C 2008 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved 3 30 3 Printer specific Adjustments 3 9 To Easily Adjust the Overall Contrast Before the adjustment The image is printed with a natural contrast Default printing After the adjustment After the adjustment The contrast is decreased The contrast is increased Q Explanation The contrast of the print image can be easily adjusted by changing the Contrast option on the printer driver e STUDIO5520C 6520C 6530C 2008 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved 3 31 3 Printer specific Adjustments Q Procedures Both the service technician and the user can perform all adjustments M 1 Change the Contrast option on the printer driver Select the desired value for contrast on a scale of 4 Lowest to 4 Highest For Windows PcL
116. adjustment and background adjustment in order to make the pale area highlight of the original look darker and sharper on the copy Q Procedures You can start with any of the procedures But it is recommended to perform the procedures in order as listed below You can use one procedure in conjunction with another But if this changes the image quality more than required or loses the effectiveness of the adjustment restore the settings made in the previously used procedure to the original ones Then use other procedures Both the service technician and the user can use procedures 1 and 3 Only the service technician must use procedures 2 and 4 IB Il 1 Press the IMAGE button on the Control Panel Press the BACKGROUND ADJUSTMENT button Press the DARK button to darken the background After increasing the background density copy and check the copy image quality With the background density set to the maximum if further image quality adjustments are still necessary the service technician must use the next procedure e STUDIO5520C 6520C 6530C 2008 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved 2 22 2 Copier specific Adjustments HI D 2 Enter adjustment mode 05 Change the values for codes 1688 to 1692 1698 to 1702 and 7759 to 7761 to adjust the density level of the background The highlighted area will become highly visible if the background density is increased Acceptable value range
117. age quality adjustments can satisfy such needs Most of the adjustments described in this manual must be performed by a service technician but a few of them can also be performed by the customer It is strongly recommended that this manual be fully utilized by not only the service technician but also the sales representative who also has opportunities of obtaining customer feedback on the image quality This manual helps the sales representative to study and comprehend what kind of customer requirements for image quality can be satisfied to make proposals to customers to improve image quality and to communicate the customers specific requirements with ease to the service technician In addition this manual is expected to facilitate the marketing of Toshiba MFPs to prospective customers that have a specific demand for image quality and the expansion of sales The adjustments described in this manual are all based on the requests of actual customers Meeting their specific wishes will only add to their satisfaction Please remember to read Caution after the adjustment to which you must pay close attention after finishing the adjustment Precautions in Servicing For adjustments to be performed by the service technician the precautions given in the Service Manual must be stringently followed The adjustments must be performed by a qualified service technician who has completed the service training course The default liste
118. ality If further image quality adjustments are still necessary use the next procedure e STUDIO5520C 6520C 6530C 3 57 2008 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved 3 Printer specific Adjustments PCL6 IC PS3 JC XPS DES This adjustment will have an effect only on Black and white mode printing 2 Enter adjustment mode 05 Increase the values for codes 7315 to 7320 or 7309 to 7310 to adjust the gamma curve balance and increase the density on Black and White mode printing Adjust the value for 05 code corresponding to the print option to be applied PDL and Halftone Printing on Macintosh is performed in PostScript See the PS3 row in the table below PDL Halftone 05 code Subcode Recommended value Acceptable value range Default PS3 600dpi Smooth 05 7315 0 1 2 Detail 05 7316 0 1 2 PS3 1200dpi Smooth 05 7309 0 1 2 Detail 05 7310 0 1 2 Set a value larger than 128 PCL6 Smooth 05 7317 0 1 2 Detail 05 7318 0 1 2 XPS Smooth 05 7319 0 1 2 Detail 05 7320 0 1 2 0 to 255 Set the value in increments of approximately 10 while checking the printouts until the optimum value is obtained The subcode varies according to the area where the density is adjusted Refer to the table below and set the subcode for the area to be adjusted Subcode
119. alue for code 08 572 within a range of 1 to 9 Value x 100 sheets to reduce the accumulated number of printed sheets It will determine the interval until the next image quality control 1s performed After a copy or print job is completed if the accumulated number of printed sheets exceeds the specified value image quality control will be performed Value for 08 572 Accumulated number of printed sheets before image quality control is performed 1 to9 100 to 900 sheets 10 1 000 sheets default After setting the value for code 08 572 forcibly perform image quality control as follows Enter adjustment mode 05 select code 396 and then press the START button After performing the adjustment print and check the image quality If further image quality adjustments are still necessary use the next procedure mu 2 The image density or color during continuous printing on the plain paper can be stabilized by changing the fusing related settings by means of the following procedures Q Procedures Follow the procedure below a Change each value of the 08 codes 411 0 Temperature of the fuser unit at ready status Heat roller normal temperature and 407 0 fusing temperature at ready status side fuser belt normal temperature from the default value 10 170 C to 9 in order to lower the temperature by 5 C The same value must be set for the 08 codes 411 0 and 407 0 unless otherwise requir
120. alue value range siidi 05 8071 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 Set a value smaller o 255 DE Detail 05 8070 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 than the default Smooth 05 8090 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 Set a value smaller 05 8089 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 than the default Set the value in increments of approximately 30 while checking the printouts until the optimum value is 1200dpi 0 to 255 obtained 0 Phinpaperl 3 miki Q Caution after the adjustment The adjustment may possibly cause dark areas such as shades on photo images to look unnaturally faint Therefore carefully perform the adjustment while checking the printouts e STUDIO5520C 6520C 6530C 2008 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved 3 93 3 Printer specific Adjustments 3 23 To Register the Image Quality Adjusted Corresponding to a Preference To use the Custom Color Settings Q Explanation The option to obtain the desired print image quality can be registered as Custom Color Settings This adjustment will have an effect only on printing on a Windows PCL6 or PS3 or XPS emulation printer driver This adjustment cannot be performed on a Macintosh printer driver Q Procedures Both the service technician and the user can perform all adjustments As an example of using Customer Color Settings if Presentation is selected as the base type from among the Image Quality Type options the procedure below is to set a larger value for the Mi
121. alue within the recommended value range mentioned in the procedures Otherwise it may cause a loss in MFP performance including degradation in the image quality and a reduction in the life of the consumables If the adjustment causes a toner fixing problem decrease the values for codes 05 1613 to 1618 e STUDIO5520C 6520C 6530C 2008 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved 2 60 2 Copier specific Adjustments 2 14 To Obtain Smooth Gray Scale Photo Images Halftones are not accurately reproduced Halftones are reproduced better Q Explanation When a photo image or gradational image is copied in the Black mode with the Text Photo mode selected halftones are not accurately reproduced Select the Photo mode or the Image smoothing mode from among the original mode options in order to reproduce halftones better in the Black mode e STUDIO5520C 6520C 6530C 2008 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved 2 61 2 Copier specific Adjustments Q Procedures Both the service technician and the user can perform all adjustments 1 Press the BASIC button on the Control Panel Select PHOTO from among the original mode options To have PHOTO selected from among the original mode options by default refer to procedure 1 in 2 8 To Eliminate Moir After selecting the Photo mode copy and check the copy image quality If further image quality adjustments are still necessary use the next procedu
122. amp Graphic OK J Cancel App Helo Restore Defaults Image Quality Type Line Art To make the color darker and enhance thin lines Halftone Auto or Detail To make the halftone screen high frequency TOSHIBA e STUDIO6530CSeries PS3 Printing Preferences p Basic Finishing Paper Handling Image Quality Effect Others Setting Print Job Nomai Pin image Qualty Type Profile Name E General Photograph Basic Color Balance Image Attribute Custom Color Settings Presentation Resolution ae pee SH rem 600dpi Lp LS Use Black for All Text T Distinguish Thin Lines Graphics Text SSS Iv Pure Black Profile None i Pure Gray dauwwWuanunan CCLLELEA Save Profile Setting Restore Defaults Apply to F Black Over Print Text amp Graphic Cancel Apply Restore Defaults e STUDIO5520C 6520C 6530C 2008 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved 3 48 3 Printer specific Adjustments For Macintosh am This adjustment will have an effect only on full color printing Open the print dialog box Change the Image Type and Halftone options The menu to select varies according to the operating system Refer to the table below and select the menu OS Menu 102x Printer Features gt Feature Sets Color settings 2 gt Image Type Printer Features Feature Sets
123. an and the user can use procedures 1 and 2 Only the service technician must use procedure 3 Note that the adjustment results of steps 1 and 2 will be applied only to the Red and Black mode The adjustment result of step 3 will be applied to both of the Red and Black mode and the Twin Color mode enabling selection of other colors M 1 Press the IMAGE button on the Control Panel Press the TWIN COLOR COPY button Press the RED amp BLACK button to enter the Red and black mode Use procedure 2 M 2 Press the ADJUST button Press the button or the gt button for Range Adjustment in order to adjust the boundary between red and black RED The black area decreases and the red area increases gt BLACK The black area increases and the red area decreases After adjusting the boundary copy and check the copy image quality If further image quality adjustments are still necessary the service technician must use the next procedure M 3 Enter adjustment mode 05 Change the values for codes 7641 7642 to adjust the boundary between black and colors other than black As the set value is increased the area of CHANGE BLACK TO will become larger On the other hand if the value is decreased the area of SECOND COLOR will become larger Mode to adjust 05 code Subcode Recommended Default value Red and black mode 05 7641 Twin color Red and black mode 0 to 255
124. an to Box This adjustment will have an effect only on the image stored in the Full color mode including the Auto color mode M 1 Scan the full color image and store it in the e Filing box For further information regarding how to scan and store images refer to the Operator s Manual for e Filing Guide and Scanning Guide Scan to Box _ HI D 2 Select a printing image mode suitable for the stored image Use steps a to d to change the printing image mode a Press the USER FUNCTIONS button on the Control Panel to enter the User Functions menu b Press the USER tab c Press the E FILING button d Press the button for the mode suitable for the image in the PRINTING IMAGE MODE option For further information regarding the features of each printing image mode refer to the explanation of the Image Quality Type options in Procedure 1 of 3 3 To Obtain the Desired Color Balance Note A change to the printing image quality mode will apply to all future printouts using the e Filing box Carefully perform the adjustment while printing out images other than the one that is used for the adjustment IB l 3 Print out the image stored in the e Filing box on the Control Panel or using the e Filing Web utility For further information regarding how to print it out refer to the Operator s Manual for e Filing Guide Q Caution after the adjustment Nothing in particular e STUDIO5
125. annot be accurately scanned As a result it may become blurred in black or grained Scan a black and white original in the Gray scale mode in order to scan and print it out in black and white more clearly Q Procedures Both the service technician and the user can perform all adjustments 1 When scanning the original press the COMMON SETTING button on the Control Panel Select IMAGE SMOOTHING from among the color mode options e STUDIO5520C 6520C 6530C 2008 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved 5 5 5 Scanning specific Adjustments Q Caution after the adjustment The adjustment may possibly increase the size of the file to be stored Therefore carefully perform the adjustment while checking the scanned in image quality The correlation between color mode and file size is as described below The ratio of the file size may vary depending on the type of original Therefore use the description below just for your reference Ratio of the file size in the Black mode to the Gray scale mode f the file size in the Black mode with the Text mode selected is 1 it will be increased to approximately 7 times in the Gray scale mode f the file size in the Black mode with the Photo mode selected is 1 it will be approximately doubled in the Gray scale mode e STUDIO5520C 6520C 6530C 2008 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved 5 6 5 Scanning specific Adjustments 5 4 To Scan the Original while Reducin
126. area 1 Medium density area After adjusting the background density copy and check the copy image quality If further image quality adjustments are still necessary use the next procedure e STUDIO5520C 6520C 6530C 2008 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved 2 29 2 Copier specific Adjustments IB l 5 Press the BASIC button on the Control Panel Select TEXT from among the original mode options To have TEXT selected from among the original mode options by default refer to procedure 1 in 2 8 To Eliminate Moir Q Caution after the adjustment The adjustment may possibly cause the highlighted area to become less visible on the copy Therefore carefully perform the adjustment while checking the copy image Remarks Enter a value within the recommended value range mentioned in the procedures Otherwise it may cause a loss in MFP performance including degradation in the image quality e STUDIO5520C 6520C 6530C 2008 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved 2 30 2 Copier specific Adjustments 2 7 To Avoid Copying the Image Seen through the Back of a Page Printed on Thin Paper Original printed on thin paper front Original printed on thin paper back When a double sided original printed on thin The images seen through the back of the page paper is copied the images seen through the are not copied any more in duplex copying back of the page are also copied
127. ary use the next procedure e STUDIO5520C 6520C 6530C 2008 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved 3 50 3 Printer specific Adjustments M 2 In procedure 1 if LineArt is selected from among the Image Quality Type options in order to adjust raster data print image or graphic data line drawing change the Sharpness option on the printer driver For Windows Open the property page of the printer driver Press the Setting button in the Image Quality tab This adjustment will have an effect only on Auto or Color mode printing Set the value for Use Sharpness Filter within a range of 1 to 4 in the Image Attribute tab Setting 4 provides the sharpest print image nitially set 4 and check the printout If further image quality adjustments are still necessary refer to lt Hint gt to do this Setting Basic Color Balance Image Attribute Contrast PR o 4 eq gt Brightness co Ue 4 f 4 E gt Background Adjustment 4 5m i 3 E Ei Saturation 4 me y v Use Sharpness Filter 4 Ki Restore Defaults OK Cancel Help DC Hp Sharpness adjustment is not available when 1200 dpi is selected for PS3 printer driver e STUDIO5520C 6520C 6530C 2008 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved 3 51 3 Printer specific Adjustments For Macintosh EED This adjustment will have an effect only on full color printing Open the print dialog b
128. ata while maintaining the image quality The Backup feature can also collectively backs up all the data in the e Filing box Note that files created through the Archive Document or Backup feature cannot be directly opened on the PC or printed out For further information regarding Archive Document and Backup refer to the e Filing Guide and Backup Restore Utility e STUDIO5520C 6520C 6530C 2008 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved 4 12 4 e Filing specific Adjustments 4 7 To Store an Image Suitable for Displaying on the Monitor or Image Editing Before the adjustment After the adjustment Copy to Box Scan to Box Print data RGB data e Filing box e Filing box Stored Stored Downloaded Downloaded Converted into RGB RGB data Client PC Client PC Stored and Stored and edited Displayed on the Displayed on the computer monitor computer monitor RGB data RGB data When the original is stored by Copy to Box it The original is stored as RGB data by Scan to will be converted into RGB data while being Box This can avoid unnecessary data downloaded to a PC This may diminish the conversion As a result the image quality can image quality be maintained e STUDIO5520C 6520C 6530C 2008 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved 4 13 4 e Filing specific Adjustments Q Explanation Initially a full color original is copied and stored in the e Filing box Copy to Box as CMYK data or op
129. ault setting has been changed Adjusting the values in detail in the Setting option allows the user to register the desired print image quality L1 Remarks The checkbox in the Custom Color Settings option will be effective only if you login using a user name belonging to Administrator or Power Users only on Windows NT4 0 2000 XP Vista Server 2003 and open the property page of the printer driver in the Printers and Faxes folder e STUDIO5520C 6520C 6530C 2008 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved 3 96 3 Printer specific Adjustments 3 24 To Print a Full Color Original in Two Colors Before the adjustment After the Adjustment Population transition by County 1920 2000 Population transition by County 1920 2000 Costy population has been increasing rapidy every year A ocuanien han been nceasieg rajidy every your The napad population grow wd have a graat effect on city development soch Tho sapai population growth wil have a great ehec on Cry develepement soch 2 thw Fansconaton eystom 2 thw Fantconaton eyston Oc fo ofer hand co C shows no popula The cary end mica sector stagnation sees to have caused tre population growth 1o slow down There mas no remarratie difleronce Denseon macs teras proportion tor af countnas Each county mas approxiesatoly 508 50 x one oer 1920 1980 2000 The original is printed in the Full color mode The areas other than bla
130. ault to increase the 1 1 1 8 05 8212 OIE ere 121 148 Image 05 8254 0 1 2 3 4 the K toner 1 1 1 8 1 05 8251 0 1 2 3 4 1 1 1 8 1 The subcode varies according to the Image quality type where the adjustment is performed Refer to the table below and set the subcode for the Image quality type to adjust Image Quality Type General Photograph Color Profile Note If the graphic and image options are changed the adjustment may possibly cause the unnatural hue of gradational and photo images and the inadequate reproducibility of gradations Therefore carefully perform the adjustment while checking the printouts e STUDIO5520C 6520C 6530C 2008 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved 3 86 3 Printer specific Adjustments _XPS 5 Open the property page of the printer driver and press Setting button in the Image Quality tab Mark the This adjustment will have an effect only on Auto or Color mode printing Detail checkbox in the Color Balance tab and then press the Edit button Set the value for the Low Medium density of the color you would like to adjust within a range of 1 to 4 in the Color Balance Details option This adjustment will have an effect only on printing on the Windows PCL6 PS3 or XPS emulation printer driver This adjustment cannot be performed on a Macintosh printer driver nitially set 4 and check the printout Color Balance Detail
131. aused job is resumed TI 150 minutes or longer default value image quality control is performed before the paused job is resumed 12 180 minutes or longer image quality control is performed before the paused job is resumed 13 240 minutes or longer image quality control is performed before the paused job is resumed 14 300 minutes or longer image quality control is performed before the paused job is resumed 15 360 minutes or longer image quality control is performed before the paused job is resumed Note Do not disable the Auto shut off mode timer setting 0 is set for 08 206 while the Auto power save timer setting is set to invalid 0 is set for 08 205 If both settings are set to invalid this equipment does not enter the energy saving mode so it is always in the ready status Due to this image quality control according to the period of time the MFP is left unused is not performed regardless of the setting value of 08 571 After setting the value for code 08 571 forcibly perform image quality control as follows Enter adjustment mode 05 select code 396 and then press the START button e STUDIO5520C 6520C 6530C 2008 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved 1 17 1 General Adjustments Copying Printing and e Filing Output from Box A large number of sheets are printed hundreds of copies or more per day and the image quality needs to be constantly maintained Set the v
132. ave as file Email InternetFax Printer Print Service ICC Profile Version Save Cancel Restore to Factory Default Profiles Setting RGB Source Profile Default Profile SourceRGB_v10 Default Profile SourceCMYK_v10 Default Profile Rendering Intent Perceptual Relative Colorimetric Saturation Absolute Colorimetric d Click Browse of Import new Profile to select a file for the profile Then click Import Maintenance Destination Profiles Previous Default Profile OutputCMYK_v10 MS_OP_A00 icc File Name C Users ooox Documents Work_Im Browse Import fewwornne rams i pw SE e Click Previous The display returns to the ICC Profile submenu f Click Save A confirmation dialog box is displayed g Click OK For the details of TopAccess see the TopAccess Guide e STUDIO5520C 6520C 6530C 3 121 2008 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved 3 Printer specific Adjustments Image Quality tab menu Then click Setting TOSHIBA e STUDIO6530CSeries PS3 Printing Preferences Basic Finishing Paper Handling Image Quality Effect Others E i 3 Open the Properties page of the printer driver and then select Advanced on the Image Quality Type option on the Print Job Norma Print z El Image Quality Type Profile Name Es General E Photograph al Presentation lt E Line Art
133. background lighter Base original mode Density mode 05 code 2 Copier specific Adjustments Accepta Recommended value ble Default range value Text Photo Automatic 05 7279 Set a value larger than Manual 05 7280 0 to 255 128 128 Set the value in increments of approximately 25 while checking the copy image until the optimum value is obtained Q Cautions after the adjustment Nothing in particular e STUDIO5520C 6520C 6530C 2 77 2008 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved 2 Copier specific Adjustments 2 18 2 To Adjust Custom Mode Settings in Color Mode All the steps in the adjustment procedure shall be performed by the service technician MF 1 Enter the setting mode 08 Change the value for the code 506 to enable the functions of the custom mode in the color mode Value for 08 506 0 Unused 1 Used Text Photo base User mode for color mode The default adjustment value for the custom mode is preset at the one that reproduces image quality equivalent to that of the Text Photo mode in the color mode at the shipment After setting the value go to the next step HI D 2 Enter the adjustment mode 05 Adjust each setting value for the custom mode to satisfy the user s request Select the necessary adjustments from the procedures below To make background lighter a Enter the adjustment mode 05
134. balance and increase the color density Adjust the value for 05 code corresponding to the print option to be applied PDL and Halftone e STUDIO5520C 6520C 6530C 2008 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved 3 53 3 Printer specific Adjustments Ex When printing on Windows is performed with the following options selected PCL6 Image Quality Type Presentation Halftone Detail 7 Change the values for Y 05 8062 M 05 8063 C 05 8064 and K 05 8065 When printing on Macintosh is with the following option selected Image Type Line Art Halftone Auto 7 Change the values for Y 05 8054 M 05 8055 C 05 8056 and K 05 8057 Printing on Macintosh is performed in PostScript See the PS3 row in the table below Color to PDL Halftone 05 Subcode Recommended Acceptable adjust code value value range PCL6 Detail 05 8062 0 1 2 Y PS3 600dpi Detail 05 8054 0 1 2 Yellow PS3 1200dpi Detail 05 8272 0 1 2 XPS Detail 05 8046 0 1 2 PCL6 Detail 05 8063 0 1 2 M PS3 600dpi Detail 05 8055 0 1 2 Magenta PS3 1200dpi Detail 05 8273 0 1 2 XPS Detail 05 8047 0 1 2 Set a value larger PCL6 Detail 05 8064 0 1 2 than 128 PS3 600dpi Detail 05 8056 0 1 2 PS3 1200dpi Detail 05 8274 0 1 2 XPS Detail 05 8048 0 1 2 PCL6 Detail 05 8065 0 1 2 PS3 600dpi Detail 05 8057 0 1 2 Black PS3 1200dpi Detail 05 8275 0 1 2 XPS Detail 05 8049 0 1 2 Set the value in increments of approximately 20 while ch
135. ble mode Press the button to enhance the tint of the color or the button to decrease it Press the DETAIL button The tint of the color can be adjusted according to the density area low medium or high density area Q Caution after the adjustment Nothing in particular e STUDIO5520C 6520C 6530C 2008 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved 2 67 2 Copier specific Adjustments 2 16 2 To Adjust the Reproducibility of Black in the Red and Black Mode The service technician must perform all adjustments UI 1 Enter adjustment mode 05 Set 1 for code 1761 to change the setting which is intended to improve the reproducibility of black areas f you are making a twin color copy in the red and black mode red may be blended into the black area In this case switching the value for this code reduces a blend of red in the black area on the copy Reproducibility of black in the red and black mode VEMM nn for a twin color copy Default Intended to improve the reproducibility of black Q Caution after the adjustment Setting 1 for code 05 1761 may not provide a clear boundary between red and black Therefore carefully perform the adjustment while checking the copy image e STUDIO5520C 6520C 6530C 2008 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved 2 68 2 Copier specific Adjustments 2 16 3 To Adjust the Boundary between Black and Colors other than Black Both the service technici
136. btain a better scanned in image while reducing noise This adjustment will have an effect on the image scanned in the Full color mode including the Auto color mode or the Gray scale mode Q Procedures You can start with any of the procedures But it is recommended to perform the procedures in order as listed below You can use one procedure in conjunction with another But if this changes the image quality more than required or loses the effectiveness of the adjustment restore the settings made in the previously used procedure to the original ones Then use other procedures Both the service technician and the user can use this procedure However step 3 in the procedure must be performed only by the service technician mP 1 When scanning the original press the COMMON SETTING button on the Control Panel Select LOW from among the compression rate options MID is selected from among the compression rate options by default After changing the compression rate scan the original and check the scanned in image quality If further image quality adjustments are still necessary use procedure 2 e STUDIO5520C 6520C 6530C 2008 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved 5 1 5 Scanning specific Adjustments nw 2 When scanning the original press the COMMON SETTING button on the Control Panel Select a higher resolution in the resolution option 200 dpi is selected from among the resolut
137. c Adjustments Note Making the highlighted area more visible or increasing the background density and eliminating the background color or decreasing the background density are mutually contradictory If the density of the background color is decreased the highlighted area may become less visible After adjusting the background density copy and check the copy image quality If further image quality adjustments are still necessary use the next procedure IB I 3 Press the BASIC button on the Control Panel Select TEXT from among the original mode options To have TEXT selected from among the original mode options by default refer to procedure 1 in 2 8 To Eliminate Moir Q Caution after the adjustment The adjustment may possibly cause the highlighted area to become less visible on the copy Therefore carefully perform the adjustment while checking the copy image Remarks Enter a value within the recommended value range mentioned in the procedures Otherwise it may cause a loss in MFP performance including degradation in the image quality e STUDIO5520C 6520C 6530C 2008 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved 2 36 2 Copier specific Adjustments 2 8 To Eliminate Moir Before the adjustment After the adjustment SLL gy e vali es Moir occurs on the photo image Moir is eliminated and a clear copy image is obtained U Explanation When an original containing photo images or
138. c Adjustments 3 25 4 To Convert Colors with Specified Source ICC Profiles Not Using Embedded ICC Profiles Q Explanation When a user s RGB images or CMYK images have embedded ICC profiles the user can ignore the embedded ICC profiles and apply a different ICC profile previously specified by the user so that he or she can obtain print images whose quality is equivalent to that of Fiery images Q Procedures Both the service technician and the user can perform all settings M 1 Create the desired printer profile using the ICC profile creation software XPS I 2 Access TopAccess and open the Administration tab menu Then upload the desired RGB source profile CMYK source profile and printer profile Follow a to g below to upload the profiles a Access TopAccess and open the Administration tab menu b Open the Setup menu and the ICC Profile submenu Logout Device f Job Status f Loos Registration f Counter User Management PT Setup Setup General Network Copier Save as file Email InternetFax Printer Print Servicdi ICC Profile iVersion Save Cancel e STUDIO5520C 6520C 6530C 2008 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved 3 120 c Click Maintenance for the desired profile The Maintenance Destination Profiles page for the selected profile is displayed TopAccess oa Logout Administration Setup ICC Profile General Network Copier S
139. cedures Otherwise it may cause a loss in MFP performance including degradation in the image quality and a reduction in the life of the consumables e STUDIO5520C 6520C 6530C 2008 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved 2 34 2 Copier specific Adjustments 2 7 2 To Adjust the Copy Image Quality in the Full Color Mode You can start with any of the procedures But it is recommended to perform the procedures in order as listed below You can use one procedure in conjunction with another But if this changes the image quality more than required or loses the effectiveness of the adjustment restore the settings made in the previously used procedure to the original ones Then use other procedures Both the service technician and the user can use procedures 1 and 3 Only the service technician must use procedure 2 UE 1 Press the IMAGE button on the Control Panel Press the BACKGROUND ADJUSTMENT button Press the LIGHT button to decrease the background density After decreasing the background density copy and check the copy image quality With the background density set to the minimum if the images seen through the back of the page are still copied the service technician must use the next procedure IB 2 Enter adjustment mode 05 Change the values for codes 1688 to 1692 and 1698 to 1702 to adjust the background density Acceptable value range Adjustment Original mode 05 code Recommended va
140. ck is printed in the same color Red Q Explanation Select the twin color print mode option in order to change colored text and lines on full color original and print out the original The Twin color print mode particularly affects originals containing clear text and lines It does not affect originals where gradations of photo images are required The Twin Color mode is not available when 1200 dpi is selected for the PS3 printer driver Q Procedures The procedure to use varies depending on whether To Adjust Colors To Adjust the Sharpness or To Print a Full Color Original in Two Colors Refer to the procedure corresponding to the particular user s request e STUDIO5520C 6520C 6530C 2008 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved 3 97 3 Printer specific Adjustments 3 24 1 To Adjust Colors UII 1 Select Twin Color from among the Color options on the printer driver For Windows Open the property page of the printer driver Select Twin Color from among the Color options in the Basic tab Press the Details button Select the color to be used for the area other than black from among the Color options TOSHIBA e STUDIO6530CSeries PS3 Printing Preferences Print Job Normal Print den Letter a E Gens o Tek r Profile None Save Profile Restore Defaults IS uL QV Basic Finishing Paper Handling Image
141. color compared with that for the other colors or it may create a difference in the reproducibility of halftones e STUDIO5520C 6520C 6530C 2008 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved 3 70 3 Printer specific Adjustments 3 17 To Decrease the Image Density and Save Toner To Print in the Toner Save Mode Before the adjustment After the adjustment Sales Contest Sales Contest Grand prize trip for two to the Cayman Islands Grand prize trip for two to the Cayman Islands Default printing Printing is performed while the toner is being saved Q Explanation The e STUDIO5520C 6520C 6530C offers a toner save mode It is intended to automatically decrease the image density and reduce the amount of toner used Change the option on the printer driver and perform printing in the toner save mode for instance if a large number of copies have to be printed or if the image density is too high Q Procedures Both the service technician and the user can perform all adjustments e STUDIO5520C 6520C 6530C 2008 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved 3 71 3 Printer specific Adjustments E 1 Enable the Toner Save option on the printer driver For Windows PcLe Ps3 xs Open the property page of the printer driver Mark the Toner Save checkbox in the Others tab TOSHIBA e STUDIO6530CSeries PS3 Printing Preferences Basic Finishing Paper Handling Image Quality Effect
142. colors are precisely converted can be obtained Q Procedures Both the service technician and the user can perform all settings MI 1 Create the desired printer profile using the ICC profile creation software M 2 Access TopAccess and open the Administration tab menu Then upload the desired RGB source profile and printer profile Follow a to g below to upload the profiles a Access TopAccess and open the Administration tab menu b Open the Setup menu and the ICC Profile submenu TopAccess silica Logout Device Job Status Logs Registration Counter User Management Administration Setup Setup General Network Copier Save as file Email InternetFax Printer Print Servicdl ICC Profile f version Save Cancel e STUDIO5520C 6520C 6530C 2008 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved 3 112 c Click Maintenance for the desired profile The Maintenance Destination Profiles page for the selected profile is displayed Administration Setup ICC Profile General Network Copier Save as file Email InternetFax Printer Print Service ICC Profile Version Profiles Setting Default Profile SourceRGB_v10 CMYK Source Profile Default Profile SourceCMYK_v10 Maintenance _ Default Profile OutputCMYK v10 Rendering Intent Perceptual Relative Colorimetric Saturation Absolute Colorimetric d Click Browse
143. creen Photograph Photograph is intended to improve the reproducibility of halftones such as photos and gradational images This provides the color balance closely matching the one on the monitor with sRGB selected as a color space If Photograph is selected Smooth which is intended to improve the reproducibility of gradations will be applied to graphics and images while Detail which is intended to improve the resolving power will be applied to text from among the Halftone options Presentation Presentation 1s intended to improve to the reproducibility of vivid colors It is suitable for printing presentation materials and graphics which require sharp contrast images The color balance this option provides does not match the one on the monitor because priority is given to printing in highly vivid colors If Presentation is selected Smooth which is intended to improve the reproducibility of gradations will be applied to graphics and images while Detail which is intended to improve the resolving power will be applied to text from among the Halftone options Line Art Line Art is intended to reproduce thin lines clearly without jaggies visible on the printout It is suitable for printing out line drawings The color reproduction this option provides is the same as the one the Presentation option provides But if LineArt is selected a special operation is provided to reproduce thin lines more clea
144. d mentioned in this manual may be different from the actual ones due to the timing of shipping firmware version But note that the recommended values and acceptable value range stated in this manual remain the same Purpose of the Imaging Manual Icons The following icons used in this manual denote the following E PCL6 XPS Copy to Box Copy An adjustment having an effect on copying in the Black mode excluding the Image smoothing mode Printer An adjustment having an effect on Black and White mode printing The adjustment will be effective if Black and White is selected from among the Color options on the Windows printer driver or if Mono is selected from among the Color Type options on the Macintosh print dialog Scan An adjustment having an effect on scanning in the Black mode Copy An adjustment having an effect on copying in the Image smoothing mode in the Black mode Scan An adjustment having an effect on scanning in the Gray scale mode Copy An adjustment having an effect on copying in the Full color mode Printer An adjustment having an effect on full color printing The adjustment will be effective if Auto or Color is selected from among the Color options on the Windows printer driver or if Auto or Color is selected from among the Color Type options on the Macintosh print dialog Scan An adjustment having an effect on scanning in the Ful
145. ddle density of the color in the Color Balance Details option and register the name of Draft agenda IJ 1 Open the property page of the printer driver in the Printers and Faxes folder Press the Setting button in the Image Quality tab Change the options in the Basic Color Balance and Image Attribute tabs in order to obtain the desired print image quality Ex Mark the Detail checkbox in the Color Balance tab Press the Edit button Set the value for the Middle density of the color in the Color Balance Details option Setting Basic Color Balance Image Attribute Color Balance Detail All Colors Each Color Dg Cyan M Magenta Yellow Bg Black Restore Defaults Restore Defaults Cancel After setting the values use the procedure e STUDIO5520C 6520C 6530C 2008 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved 3 94 3 Printer specific Adjustments PcL PS3 _ XPS UI 2 Register the name for what has been specified in procedure 1 in the Basic tab in the Setting option Use steps a to c to register the name a Mark the Save Current setting as checkbox in the Custom Color Settings option b Enter an optional name in the Name option c Select the type you would like to use as the base one from among the Image Quality Type options in Original Image Quality Type Setting Basic Color Balance Image Attribute Custom C
146. density area depending on the set value e STUDIO5520C 6520C 6530C 2008 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved 2 3 2 Copier specific Adjustments The subcode varies according to the area where the density is adjusted Refer to the table below and set the subcode for the area to be adjusted The density of light text or a graphic image will vary if the medium or high density area is mainly adjusted Setting 0 for the subcode allows you to adjust the low density area But it will not affect the light text or graphic images Therefore never change the value for the low density area Subcode Area where the density is adjusted 1 Medium density area 2 High density area After changing the value make a copy and check the image quality If further image quality adjustments are necessary reset all the values changed in steps 1 to 6 above to the default ones and then follow the next step EI 7 Enter setting mode 08 Change the value for subcode 3 of code 2548 to make the outline of the copied text thicker and clearer or thinner and finer This adjustment can be made applicable to all colors by selecting the corresponding subcode In this step however change the setting value only for subcode 3 to adjust the image quality for the black mode Setting item 08 code Subcode Acceptable Default range value Recommended value Potential on printing white text
147. djustments 3 4 To Closely Match the Color Balance on the Monitor As viewed on the monitor The color balance as viewed on the monitor The color balance of the printout is closely looks different from the printout matched with the one on the monitor Q Explanation The color balance on the printouts is initially programmed to provide the maximum color saturation within the range of colors reproducible in printing In general colors which can be reproduced vary depending on whether they are reproduced on the printout or on the monitor or depending on whether they are reproduced in ink or with the light Consequently the color balance on the printout cannot be perfectly matched with the one on the monitor Change the Image Quality Type option in order to closely match the color balance on the printout with the one on the monitor at a user s request This adjustment will be effective in closely matching the color balance on the printout with the one on the monitor if the sRGB is selected as a color space Therefore remember that it may not be matched with the color balance on the monitor which does not support sRGB or if a color space other than sRGB is selected On commercially available monitors sRGB is not selected as a color space by default e STUDIO5520C 6520C 6530C 2008 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved 3 14 3 Printer specific Adjustments Q Procedures Both the service technician and the use
148. dures Only the service technician must use procedure 4 Both the service technician and the user can use procedures 1 to 3 Procedure 2 Hue adjustment cannot be selected concurrently with procedure 3 Color balance RGB adjustments Performing either of the adjustments and then another adjustment clears what has been previously adjusted For example using procedure 2 and then procedure 3 clears the adjusted hue using procedure 4 e STUDIO5520C 6520C 6530C 2008 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved 2 12 2 Copier specific Adjustments EMMY Perform automatic calibration to correct variations in the copy density ADMIN is selected from among the CALIBRATION DISPLAY LEVEL options by default In other words an administrator is authorized to operate automatic calibration But the USER option can also be selected to allow the user to operate it Refer to the User Functions Guide for further information regarding how to select the CALIBRATION DISPLAY LEVEL option Use steps a through 1 to perform automatic calibration a Press the USER FUNCTIONS button on the Control Panel to enter the User Functions menu b Press the ADMIN tab c Enter an administrator password of 6 to 10 digits Press the ENTER button d Press the GENERAL button e Press the CALIBRATION button f Press the COPY button g Press the CALIBRATION button to print out the test chart h Place
149. e Default value range 05 code Recommended value 05 1630 Set a value larger than 5 to 05 1631 increase the density 05 1632 Set a value smaller than 5 to decrease the density 05 1633 This adjustment will be effective only if the TEXT PHOTO or TEXT mode is selected from among the original mode options If the TEXT PHOTO mode is selected the adjustment will affect only text or an area which is recognized as text After adjusting the maximum color density of the text copy and check the copy image quality If further image quality adjustments are still necessary use the next procedure Press the BASIC button on the Control Panel Select TEXT from among the original mode options To have TEXT selected from among the original mode options by default refer to procedure 1 in 2 8 To Eliminate Moir After changing the value make a copy and check the image quality If further image quality adjustments are necessary reset all the values changed in steps 1 to 5 above to the default one and then follow the next step e STUDIO5520C 6520C 6530C 2008 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved 2 7 2 Copier specific Adjustments M 6 Enter setting mode 08 Change the value for code 2548 to make the outline of the copied text thicker and clearer or thinner and finer This adjustment can be made applicable to all colors by selecting the corresponding subcode H
150. e PS3 _ C Open the property page of the printer driver Press the Setting button in the Image Quality tab Change the Contrast option in the Image Attribute tab This adjustment will have an effect only on Auto or Color mode printing Setting Basic Color Balance Image Attribute Contrast Brightness E Background Adjustment hr f E Saturation 0 Use Sharpness Filter 4 f Restore Defaults Cancel Help e STUDIO5520C 6520C 6530C 2008 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved 3 32 3 Printer specific Adjustments For Macintosh am This adjustment will have an effect only on full color printing Open the print dialog box Change the Contrast option The menu to select varies according to the operating system Refer to the table below and select the menu OS Menu 10 2 x Printer Features gt Feature Sets Color settings 4 gt Contrast 10 3 x 10 4 x 10 5x Color Settings 2 gt Contrast Printer TOSHIBA e STUDIO6530C HJ o Presets Standard m Color Settings 2 Hd Color Balance Cyan 0 Magenta 0 Image Attribute Sharpness 0 Brightness 0 PDF v Preview Cancel Print Q Caution after the adjustment Nothing in particular e STUDIO5520C 6520C 6530C 2008 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved 3 33 3 Printer specific Adjustments 3 10
151. e Quality after Return from the Auto Power Save Mode Change the value of the 08 code 571 to change the conditions for starting image quality control shorten the period of time the MFP is left unused after the MFP was recovered from the auto power save mode so that the image quality control will be easily performed less in Period of time the MFP is left unused before starting image quality control 0 3 minutes or longer image quality control is performed before the paused job is resumed 1 5 minutes or longer image quality control is performed before the paused job is resumed 2 7 minutes or longer image quality control is performed before the paused job is resumed 3 10 minutes or longer image quality control is performed before the paused job is resumed 4 15 minutes or longer image quality control is performed before the paused job is resumed 5 20 minutes or longer image quality control is performed before the paused job is resumed 6 30 minutes or longer image quality control is performed before the paused job is resumed 7 45 minutes or longer image quality control is performed before the paused job is resumed 8 60 minutes or longer image quality control is performed before the paused job is resumed 9 90 minutes or longer image quality control is performed before the paused job is resumed 10 120 minutes or longer image quality control is performed before the p
152. e a shadow because the original cover is not fully closed Q Explanation When originals such as books are copied an area outside of the image 1s copied like a shadow because the original cover is not fully closed Use the Outside Erase function to avoid copying areas outside of the image Q Procedures Both the service technician and the user can use all the steps of this adjustment Dmm 1 Press the EDIT tab on the touch panel and then press the OUTSIDE ERASE button Change the border between the original and areas not belonging to the original by pressing either or as required When you adjust it to side the area to be detected as that not belonging to the original is widened When you adjust it to side the area to be detected as that not belonging to the original is narrowed Notes The Outside Erase function may not be operated correctly under the following conditions When making copies in a bright room leaving the RADF or the Platen Cover opened The density of areas not belonging to the original is lowered due to outside light When the original has extremely dark areas The extremely dark areas are wrongly detected as areas not belonging to the original and thus erased n case of special originals e g a three dimensional object an original with black edges the edges of an opened book Q Caution after the adjustment Areas not belonging to the original may not be erased exactly as the
153. e background density After decreasing the background density scan the original and check the scanned in image quality With the background density set to the minimum if further image quality adjustments are still necessary the service technician must use the next procedure e STUDIO5520C 6520C 6530C 2008 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved 5 3 5 Scanning specific Adjustments Hi W 3 Enter adjustment mode 05 Change the values for codes 1070 to 1072 to decrease the background density The code to use varies depending on color mode and original mode Adjust the value for 05 code corresponding to the color mode for which you would like to improve the image quality Acceptable Default value range Color mode Original mode 05 code Recommended value Text 05 1070 Full color Printed image 05 1071 Seta value smaller than 50 0 to 50 50 Photo 05 1072 Set the value in increments of approximately 10 while checking the scanned in image until the optimum value is obtained The background density in the Full color mode code 05 1070 1071 or 1072 will become the lowest if 0 is set On the other hand it will become the highest if 50 is set Changing the value will also change the background density in the Full color mode when the Background Adjustment indicator is set to the center Then if the background density of the center value is changed each step of the indicator wi
154. e background density copy and check the copy image quality If further image quality adjustments are still necessary use the next procedure i WZ 3 Press the BASIC button on the Control Panel Press the D button to increase the copy density After increasing the copy density copy and check the copy image quality With the copy density set to the maximum if further image quality adjustments are still necessary the service technician must use the next procedure e STUDIO5520C 6520C 6530C 2008 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved 2 23 2 Copier specific Adjustments IB 4 Enter adjustment mode 05 Change the values for codes 1779 to 1798 to adjust the color density Color to adjust Acceptable Default value range Original mode 05 code Subcode Recommended value Text Photo 05 1779 0 1 Text 05 1780 0 1 Printed image 05 1781 0 1 Photo 05 1782 0 1 Map 05 1783 0 1 Text Photo 05 1784 0 1 Text 05 1785 0 1 Printed image 05 1786 0 1 Y Yellow M M t Magenta Photo 05 1787 0 1 Set a value larger than 128 Map 05 1788 0 1 to increase the density Text Photo 05 1789 Text 05 1790 0 1 Printed image 05 1791 0 1 Photo 05 1792 0 1 Map 05 1793 Text Photo 05 1794 Text 05 1795 Printed image 05 1796 Photo 05 1797 Map 05 1798 Set the value in increments of approximately 10 while checking the copy image until the optimum value is 0 to 255 Set a
155. e compression rate on a job by job basis For further information regarding the template and its use refer to the Operator s Manual for Scanning Guide and TopAccess Guide To change the default compression rate Use steps a to d to change the default compression rate a Press the USER FUNCTIONS button on the Control Panel to enter the User Functions menu b Press the USER tab c Press the SCAN button d Press the HIGH button in the COMPRESS option Q Caution after the adjustment Changing the default compression rate of the scanning functions will affect the quality of originals which will be stored in the Full color including the Auto color or the Gray scale mode Carefully perform the adjustment being aware that the image quality of all future images will be changed when storing originals other than the one that is used for the adjustment Q Remarks Ifthe full color or gray scale image is copied or printed and stored in the e Filing box Copy to Box or Print to Box the user can select a desired compression rate when downloading the image using File Downloader on a client PC e STUDIO5520C 6520C 6530C 2008 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved 4 4 4 e Filing specific Adjustments 4 3 To Store a Color Photo Image while Minimizing Moir Before the adjustment After the adjustment va FLA wx When the magazine article containing full Storing it in the Printed image mode will color p
156. e copy image Q Remarks Enter a value within the recommended value range mentioned in the procedures Otherwise it may cause a loss in MFP performance including degradation in the image quality and a reduction in the life of the consumables f you perform only step 7 above changing the setting value of subcode 3 of code 08 2548 as an image quality adjustment for the black mode it may cause an extra increase or decrease in the amount of K toner used compared with that for the other colors or it may create a difference in the reproducibility of halftones e STUDIO5520C 6520C 6530C 2008 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved 2 5 2 Copier specific Adjustments 2 1 2 To Adjust the Copy Image Quality in the Full Color Mode The setting value for the Full color mode shall be applied also when the original is judged as the full color image in the Auto color mode You can start with any of the procedures But it is recommended to perform the procedures in order as listed below You can use one procedure in conjunction with another But if this changes the image quality more than required or loses the effectiveness of the adjustment restore the settings made in the previously used procedure to the original ones Then use other procedures Both the service technician and the user can use procedures 1 2 and 5 Only the service technician must use procedures 3 4 and 6 Ul 1 Press the BASIC butto
157. e puew utra Monnumy ejusmod tempor inciunt ut labore et dolore magna aliquam erat volupat TOSHIBA TOSHIBA Activities for the Family Your Kids Rate their Favorites Activities for the Family Your Kids Rate their Favorites water beach Activities ight seeing shop eq S CN QY Aativities Results based ce a survey of Tedwind Premier Kids When a light print image is copied the text The graphic image and text look darker and looks blurred sharper Q Explanation Perform image processing in order to obtain a sharp and dark copy image when copying an original containing light text and graphic images or a light copy image when copying an original containing a highly colored text and copy image Q Procedures The procedure to use varies depending on whether to adjust the copy image quality in the Black mode Full color mode or Auto color mode Refer to the procedure corresponding to the particular user s request e STUDIO5520C 6520C 6530C 2008 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved 2 1 2 Copier specific Adjustments 2 1 4 To Adjust the Copy Image Quality in the Black Mode You can start with any of the procedures But it is recommended to perform the procedures in order as listed below You can use one procedure in conjunction with another But if this changes the image quality more than required or loses the effectiveness of the adjustment restore the
158. e resolution options by default Select a lower resolution option 100 dpi or 150 dpi to reduce the file size This adjustment will have an effect on an image scanned in all color modes Full color Gray scale Black and Auto color After changing the resolution scan the original and check the scanned in image quality If further image quality adjustments are still necessary use other procedures When scanning the original press the COMMON SETTING button on the Control Panel Select TEXT from among the original mode options Perform this adjustment only if a black and white original containing no photo images is scanned or if degradation in the photo image quality 1s acceptable This adjustment will be effective only if TEXT PHOTO or PHOTO is initially selected from among the original mode options This adjustment will have an effect only on an image scanned in the Black mode After changing original mode scan the original and check the scanned in image quality If further image quality adjustments are still necessary use other procedures When scanning the original press the COMMON SETTING button on the Control Panel Select HIGH from among the compression rate options MID is selected from among the compression rate options by default This adjustment will have an effect only on an image scanned in the Full color mode including the Auto color mode or the Gray scale mode After changing
159. e threshold for in the network scanning function is also changed Originals with a small portion of small letters may be judged as a blank page Therefore adjust the value carefully while checking the copy image e STUDIO5520C 6520C 6530C 2008 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved 2 84 2 Copier specific Adjustments 2 21 To Obtain Image in Even Density Level Original After the adjustment TOSHIBA COPIER DEMONSTRATION CHART 8 1 eo SINE TORNA nae Feeding direction When the density is adjusted automatically the When the density is adjusted density on the entire copy image becomes manually the density of the entire uneven copy image is even Before the adjustment DEMONSTRATION CHART 8 1 cton Aemene Bapane Cone HOW MANY DINOSAURS DOYOUKNOW Feeding direction U Explanation When an original with background is copied with the density adjustment set automatic the density of the background may become uneven To suppress this unevenness adjust the density manually Q Procedures Both the service technician and the user can use all the steps of this adjustment EMP Press the BASIC tab on the touch panel and then press Q or P to adjust the copy density level Q Caution after the adjustment Nothing in particular e STUDIO5520C 6520C 6530C 2008 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved 2 85 e STUDIO5520C 6520C 6530C 2008 TOS
160. e used when Advanced is selected in the Image Quality Type option patch printing for the printer must be performed but some users have difficulty to select the correct setting items on the printer driver menu To create a proper ICC profile with the correct print image the suitable setting items must be selected Q Procedures Both the service technician and the user can perform all settings Ps3 M 1 Open the Properties page of the printer driver and then select the paper type on the Paper Type option on the Basic tab menu TOSHIBA e STUDIO6530CSeries PS3 Printing Preferences Basic Finishing Paper Handling Image Quality Effect Others Print Job Original Paper Size Normal Print v fel El Letter 81 2 x 11 z Print Paper Size F Manual Scale 4 Same as Original Size 30 2 25 400 Paper Source Paper Type Plain Auto v Plain amp uta Graphics Text gt Profile None Save Profile Delete Restore Defaults e STUDIO5520C 6520C 6530C 2008 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved 3 107 3 Printer specific Adjustments B 2 Select Advanced in the Image Quality Type option on the Image Quality tab menu and then click Setting TOSHIBA e STUDIO6530CSeries PS3 Printing Preferences Basic Finishing Paper Handling Image Quality Effect Others Print Job Normal Pit wi Image Quality
161. eRGB_v10 CMYK Source Profile LT SourceCMYK_v10 x N Japan Standard v2 Euroscale Coated v2 r Destination Profile Profile 4 OutputCMYK_v10 Rendering Intent C Perceptual Relative Colorimetric C Saturation Absolute Colorimetric Restore Defaults Update Now Cancel Help e STUDIO5520C 6520C 6530C 2008 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved 3 118 3 Printer specific Adjustments Bl 5 Select the uploaded printer profile on Profile of the Destination Profile option on the Advanced tab menu Setting Basic Color Balance Image Attribute Advanced r Source Profiles RGB Source Profile SourceRGB_v10 CMYK Source Profile 5 SourceCMYK v10 V Apply to Device Color Only r Destination Profile sa Profile 7 BuputMYk vio Renderi U S Sheetfed Coated v2 Cp Euroscale Coated v2 ell Japan Color 2001 Coated C Saturation C Absolute Colorimetric Restore Defaults Update Now Q Caution after the adjustment Nothing in particular Remarks Not all colors may be printed precisely because the color gamut reproducible with MFPs differs depending on the models The accuracy of color reproduction differs depending on printer profiles used e STUDIO5520C 6520C 6530C 3 119 2008 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved E 3 Printer specifi
162. ecking the printouts until the optimum Default value is obtained The value for 05 code for K black will affect black and white images including text lines and photos on the printout The subcode varies according to the area where the density is adjusted Refer to the table below and set the subcode for the area to be adjusted Subcode Area where the density is adjusted Low density area Medium density area High density area Note This adjustment changes the values set in the MFP Therefore it will affect every user who uses the printer by connecting it to the MFP After the adjustment the values changed will be applied to all printouts for the Image Quality Type and Halftone options For instance if the value for 05 code for PCL6 and Detail is changed it will be applied to printing performed with PCL6 and Halftone Detail or Auto selected Carefully perform the adjustment being aware that the image quality of all future printouts will be changed when printing out originals other than the one that is used for the adjustment If Smooth is selected from among the Halftone options this adjustment will have no affect After adjusting the color balance print and check the print image quality If further image quality adjustments are still necessary use the next procedure e STUDIO5520C 6520C 6530C 2008
163. ed b Change the value of the 08 code 5241 1 fusing temperature correction at ready status pressure roller normal temperature from the default value 2 0 C to 0 in order to lower the temperature by 10 C Change each value of the 08 codes 2124 0 fusing temperature at ready status center pressure roller normal temperature and 5236 0 fusing temperature at ready status side pressure roller normal temperature from the default value 4 140 C to 2 in order to lower the temperature by 10 C The same value must be set for the 08 codes 2124 0 and 5236 0 unless otherwise required Notes Confirm if the firmware version is the latest one before the setting If not update it to the latest one After these settings the machine may go into the wait status since the fusing temperature can not follow depending on the usage conditions such as low temperature thick paper just recovering after warming up etc After these settings the fusing performance may degrade depending on the usage conditions such as low temperature thick paper just recovering after warming up etc In such a case return the setting to default These settings extend the First Print Out Time by the period of time required for pre running of the first printing These settings always perform the pre running for the first printing of each job by the time required for pre running of the first print This results in reducing t
164. ed for the reproducibility of background should this adjustment be performed e STUDIO5520C 6520C 6530C 2008 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved 2 70 2 Copier specific Adjustments Q Procedures The service technician must perform all adjustments HI D 1 Enter adjustment mode 05 Change the value for the code 361 or 362 to adjust the reproducibility of the background when using the RADF Acceptable Default value range Color mode 05 code Recommended value Full color 05 361 Set a value larger than 3 to increase the background density Set a value smaller than 2 to decrease the background density Set the value in increments of approximately 1 while checking the copy image until the optimum value is obtained When changing the value from the default value for the first time it is recommended to set n2 The table below shows you the correlation between the value and image quality Reproductivity Advantage of image quality of background Default equivalent to the one obtained when an original placed on the original glass is scanned Lighter background is reproduced than the one obtained when 2 is set Lighter background is reproduced than the one obtained when the default value is set Darker background is reproduced than the one obtained when the default value is set Darker background is reproduced than the one obtained when 3 is set
165. efers to the printed side that is delivered facing upwards in the duplex mode After adjusting the transfer roller bias output perform automatic calibration Refer to step 1 in 1 1 To Obtain a Darker Image Hint The larger the setting value is the more the transfer voltage increases It is usually recommended that the set value be increased when you print on thick paper or paper with asperities on its surface On the other hand the set value should be decreased when you print on thin paper After setting the value print and check the image quality If further image quality adjustment is necessary go to step b e STUDIO5520C 6520C 6530C 2008 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved 1 12 1 General Adjustments Copying Printing and e Filing Output from Box b Enter the setting mode 08 Change the value of the codes 5293 5294 5296 to adjust fusing temperature in the recycled paper mode In this step fusing temperature is adjusted to print the high density area of the image most clearly Accepta ble value Default range Paper Recommen type 08 code Subcode ded value Adjustment Recycled paper 08 5293 7 to 10 0 to 16 Center heater Recycled paper Side heater 08 5294 Center Pressure Recycled roller paper 08 5296 After adjusting the fusing temperature perform automatic calibration Refer t
166. elow and select the menu OS Menu Printer Features gt Feature Sets Color settings 4 Sharpness Color Settings 2 gt Sharpness 10 2 x 10 3 x 10 4 x 10 5x Printer TOSHIBA e STUDIO6530C He Presets Standard Color Settings 2 Color Balance Cyan 0 Magenta 0 i f i f i 1 i I 1 1 i r Yellow 0 Black 0 i 1 1 r i i i i i i Brightness 0 Saturation 0 C PDF v Preview Cancel E Print Q Caution after the adjustment The adjustment provides a soft or blurred image in general Therefore carefully perform the adjustment while checking the printouts Especially text and lines on the background of a gradational image and text in the Format AutoShape dialog box with transparency selected on Microsoft Office may be blurred e STUDIO5520C 6520C 6530C 2008 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved 3 39 3 Printer specific Adjustments 3 12 To Make Low resolution Data Look Finer To soften an image Print data JUD DEVI Fines Hip ECL 38e gt OA ch usen Grv Qno d Addiess Links Best of the Web Channel Guide Customize Links Before the adjustment Unadjusted settings A smoother softer image is obtained Q Explanation When a low resolution image is printed the edges may be jagged Decrease the sharpness intensity in order to eliminate the jaggies from the print i
167. ent will have an effect particularly on photo images such as BMP GIF JPEG and TIFF e STUDIO5520C 6520C 6530C 2008 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved 3 37 3 Printer specific Adjustments Q Procedures Both the service technician and the user can perform all adjustments M 1 Change the Sharpness option on the printer driver For Windows Open the property page of the printer driver Press the Setting button in the Image Quality tab This adjustment will have an effect only on Auto or Color mode printing Uncheck the Use Sharpness Filter checkbox in the Image Attribute tab To make a softer image check its checkbox and then set the value within a range of 1 to 4 Setting 4 provides the smoothest softest image Setting Basic Color Balance Image Attribute Contrast Brightness a _ 4 m Background Adjustment 4 4 4 E Saturation Sharpness adjustment is not available when 1200 dpi is selected for PS3 printer driver e STUDIO5520C 6520C 6530C 2008 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved 3 38 3 Printer specific Adjustments For Macintosh am This adjustment will have an effect only on full color printing Open the print dialog box Set the value for Sharpness within a range of 1 to 4 Setting 4 provides the smoothest softest print image The menu to select varies according to the operating system Refer to the table b
168. erved 3 59 3 Printer specific Adjustments 3 15 To Make the Light Colored Area Darker on the Printout Before the adjustment After the adjustment National Use m t it or e The ava of advance n bo o o Th bility of advanced and E The launch of i te e Dand e launch of the 88th co c s satellite dd a significant capabil p g univers add a significant capability in terms of providing universal Internet Growth to 2090 Internet Growth to 2090 Tre naama s apens 1 penance consderitle row in ai weas etpenay mone MIE n Tre emeret is xps 1 experience consideratie oxi at areas espe Vots cated in Qo nap os E D ond 03 wel in bobo auth and orem prar rupem ard n 17909 Halen comes Ve map 08 L D ong L m val in boo np and opu prar epson ard n pert Halen commenti Grower orari Bai ungisnerad anret idesrucire suy on ui recesarty ba aum al rue ros n couman bai inghonerted vera inersia re early on vl racer be ewer aug vas Gomoqraghcs ed war to rece app csiore ts pranchos uds uaar cemoqragtica udi vide V nude agyacators to preschool chien Mons M mcum emm Inm Imm National Use he availability of advanced E h explosive growth in A Internet Growth to 2090 Internet Growth to 2090 Tro inermet s especied 10 expenence conederatie DAT i M aaas espeoany Tote NBCANT n Tu map as E D asd L as wal in botte norm and SOU polar ragione and in spaca mason conmunis Tere Temes Memed Tenia Megs e Se e s E E
169. ervice technician and the user can use procedure 3 IE 1 Enter setting mode 08 Change the value for code 580 or 590 to select reference original mode for Custom mode from among the original mode options Select the original mode option which is most likely to be matched with the image quality the user desires For the Black mode Value for 08 580 Reference original mode 0 Reserved Default 1 Text Photo 2 Text 3 Photo For the Full color mode Value for 08 590 Reference original mode Reserved Default Text Printed image Photo e document After selecting the reference original mode option use the next procedure e STUDIO5520C 6520C 6530C 2008 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved 5 19 5 Scanning specific Adjustments user desires Select the necessary value for 05 code in the table below Color mode 05 code Adjustment Acceptable value range EU 2 Enter adjustment mode 05 to adjust the values in the Custom mode in order to obtain the image quality the Default 05 7425 Range correction Automatic density adjustment 05 7426 Range correction Manual density adjustment Otol 05 7470 Sharpness adjustment 05 7475 Manual density adjustment center value 05 7478 Automatic density adjustment 05 7480 Gamma curve balance adjustment 0 to 255 05 8371 Fine adjustment of black density
170. etric C Saturation Absolute Colorimetric Restore Defaults Cancel Help e STUDIO5520C 6520C 6530C 2008 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved 3 110 E U 3 Printer specific Adjustments M 8 Print a color measurement patch to be used on the ICC profile creation software M 9 Create the ICC profile following the operational procedure provided by the ICC profile creation software Q Caution after the adjustment Nothing in particular Q Remarks Read the precautions provided by the ICC profile creation software carefully before starting printing The correct image may not be printed on some paper types that are out of the MFP s specifications e STUDIO5520C 6520C 6530C 2008 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved 3 111 E 3 Printer specific Adjustments 3 25 2 To Print Precise Colors Using Existing RGB Source ICC Profiles Q Explanation Some users use standard RGB color space ICC profiles that are disclosed and distributed by some websites when they print RGB images in their computers with RGB color space which matches with one of the ICC profiles they obtained from the website This method is used for example when photo images must be printed with Adobe RGB color space Namely when the user has a standard ICC profile that is most suitable for particular images he or she can apply this profile to the color conversion at the printing so that ideal print images whose
171. etting value of this code is larger than 128 default the level of the sharpness intensity is equivalent to the one when the value is set within a range of 0 to 4 on the printer driver menu When the setting value of this code is smaller than 128 the level of the sharpness intensity is equivalent to the one when the value is set within a range of 4 to 1 on the printer driver menu Note that when the setting value of this code is 0 the image quality will not be changed even if the value is changed on the printer driver menu Q Caution after the adjustment The adjustment may possibly cause outlined edges incorrect color of thin lines jaggies and variations in gradation As a result the photo image may look unnatural Therefore carefully perform the adjustment while checking the printouts e STUDIO5520C 6520C 6530C 2008 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved 3 55 LE 3 Printer specific Adjustments 3 14 2 To Adjust the Print Image Quality in the Black and White Mode Perform the adjustment in accordance with the procedures below Both the service technician and the user can use procedure 1 Only the service technician must use procedures 2 and 3 1 Change the Halftone option on the printer driver For Windows PcLe PS3 XPS Open the property page of the printer driver Press the Setting button in the Image Quality tab This adjustment will have an effect only on Blac
172. fault setting Q Procedures You can start with any of the steps However it is recommended to perform the steps in order as listed below Both the service technician and the user can use step 1 and 2 Only the service technician can use step 3 IB D Press the EDIT tab on the touch panel and then press the OMIT BLANK PAGE button Then press the OK button to enable the Omit Blank Page function After the setting copy and check the image If there is any page other than colored pages that cannot be omitted the service technician must perform the procedure below e STUDIO5520C 6520C 6530C 2008 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved 2 83 2 Copier specific Adjustments WHO Press the USER FUNCTIONS button on the Control Panel Then press or of OMIT BLANK PAGE ADJUSTMENT UIN 3 Enter the adjustment mode 05 Change the value for the code 7618 to adjust the threshold for judging the original as blank pages The larger the setting value is the more the original tends to be judged as a blank page Acceptable 05 code Recommended value range Default value 05 7618 Set a value larger than 128 0 255 128 Set the value in increments of approximately 15 until the optimum value is obtained while checking 1f proper originals are judged as a blank page Q Caution after the adjustment When the threshold for judging blank pages is changed the sam
173. fect only on Black and white mode printing WB 3 Enter adjustment mode 05 Increase the value for code 8118 to perform fine adjustment and increase the sharpness intensity Adjust the value for 05 code corresponding to the print option to be applied PDL and Color mode Printing on Macintosh is performed in PostScript See the PS3 row in the table below Recommended Acceptable value value range Black and Set a value lager than White 05 8118 128 0 to 255 128 Color mode 05 code Sub code Default Subcode Original Text Graphics Image Set the value in increments of approximately 5 while checking the printouts until the optimum value is obtained Note This adjustment changes the values set in the MFP Therefore it will affect every user who uses the printer by connecting it to the MFP After the adjustment the values changed will be applied to all printouts for the Sharpness option Carefully perform the adjustment being aware that the image quality of all future printouts will be changed when printing out originals other than the one that is used for the adjustment Q Caution after the adjustment The adjustment may possibly cause outlined edges jaggies and variations in gradation As a result the photo image may look unnatural Therefore carefully perform the adjustment while checking the printouts e STUDIO5520C 6520C 6530C 2008 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights res
174. g the File Size Before the adjustment Approx 600 KB Approx 200 KB Approx 900 KB Approx 550 KB The above file sizes are just for your reference If the original is constantly scanned at the default compression rate the file size may become larger than required Q Explanation After the adjustment Approx 100 KB Approx 30 KB Approx 150 KB Approx 90 KB The above file sizes are just for your reference If the original is scanned at a reasonable compression rate depending on the purpose of the scanned in image the file size will be successfully reduced If an original is scanned in the default resolution and at the default compression rate a proper image will be obtained for general purposes But the file size may become larger than required The file size of the scanned in image significantly varies depending on the selected resolution or compression rate If an appropriate resolution and a compression rate are selected in accordance with the purpose of the original the image quality will be maintained while the file size is being reduced Change the resolution original mode or compression rate or perform the background adjustment in order to minimize the file size of the scanned in image The e STUDIO5520C 6520C 6530C offers the Slim PDF function This will diminish the image quality but reduce the file size to approximately 1 8 to 1 10 compared to the scanned in image 30
175. ge Attribute Contrast Background Adjustment 4l 4 f 31 E 3 Saturation A rase d n 4 2 V Use Sharpness Filter 4 4 Restore Defaults Cancel Help e STUDIO5520C 6520C 6530C 2008 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved 3 61 3 Printer specific Adjustments XPS UII 2 Open the property page of the printer driver Press the Setting button in the Image Quality tab Mark the Detail checkbox in the Color Balance tab Press the Edit button This adjustment will have an effect only on Auto or Color mode printing Set the value for the Low Middle density of the color you would like to adjust within a range of 1 to 4 in the Color Balance Details option This adjustment will have an effect only on printing on a Windows PCL6 or PS3 or XPS emulation printer driver This adjustment cannot be performed on a Macintosh printer driver nitially set 4 and check the printout Color Balance Detail UM Cyan M Magenta Yellow lg Black Restore Defaults DK Cancel OK After changing the option on the printer driver print and check the print image quality If further image quality adjustments are still necessary the service technician must use the next procedure according to the image type To adjust the color image Go to procedure 3 To adjust the black and white image Go to procedure 4 e STUDIO5520C 6520C 6530C 2008 TOSHIBA TEC COR
176. gradational images halftones is copied moir sometimes occurs on the copy Perform adjustment regarding image processing sharpness intensity in order to obtain a clear copy image while eliminating moir Q Procedures You can start with any of the procedures But it is recommended to perform the procedures in order as listed below You can use one procedure in conjunction with another But if this changes the image quality more than required or loses the effectiveness of the adjustment restore the settings made in the previously used procedure to the original ones Then use other procedures Both the service technician and the user can use procedures 1 and 2 Only the service technician must use procedure 3 e STUDIO5520C 6520C 6530C 2008 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved 2 37 2 Copier specific Adjustments El 1 Press the BASIC button on the Control Panel and select the original mode option as follows To copy in the Full color or the Auto color mode Select the Printed image mode option To copy in the Black mode Select the Photo mode option To have the above original mode options selected by default use the following procedures Io change the default original mode on the Control Panel Use steps a to d to change default original mode a Press the USER FUNCTIONS button on the Control Panel to enter the User Functions menu b Press the USER tab c Press the COPY b
177. h or UNIX platform Q Procedures Both the service technician and the user can perform all adjustments CopytoBox J PrinttoBox M Il 1 Print out the image stored in the e Filing box on the Control Panel or using the e Filing Web utility For further information regarding how to print it out refer to the Operator s Manual for e Filing Guide Note ScantoBox FaxtoBox If the image is scanned or faxed and stored in the e Filing box Scan to Box or Fax to Box download it to the client PC once select the desired Image Quality Type option on the printer driver and print it out rather than printing it out directly from the e Filing box Then the image may be finely printed For further information regarding how to print full color images scanned and stored refer to 4 8 To Finely Print Color Images Scanned and Stored Q Caution after the adjustment Nothing in particular U Remarks When Archive Document of the e Filing Web utility or Backup of the e Filing Backup Restore Utility is used image data stored in the e Filing box can be converted to a file maintaining the image quality optimized for printing For example you may want to temporarily move stored data to make some space in the box and save them again in the box When data are converted to a PDF or TIFF file and then moved using the File Downloader the image quality may be diminished However you can use Archive Document or Backup to move the d
178. han 128 Map 05 1788 O 1 2 to increase the density Text Photo 05 1789 0 1 2 Text 05 1790 0 1 2 Printed image 05 1791 0 1 2 Photo 05 1792 0 1 2 Map 05 1793 0 1 2 Text Photo 05 1794 0 1 2 Text 05 1795 0 1 2 Printed image 05 1796 0 1 2 Photo 05 1797 0 1 2 Map 05 1798 0 1 2 Set the value in increments of approximately 10 while checking the copy image until the optimum value 1s obtained Y Yellow 0 to 255 Set a value smaller than 128 to decrease the density Black The value for the code corresponding to the original mode Text Photo Text or Printed image will affect the copy image quality in the Full color mode and the Auto color mode The subcode varies according to the area where the density is adjusted Refer to the table below and set the subcode for the area to be adjusted Subcode Area where the density is adjusted Low density area Medium density area High density area Q Caution after the adjustment The adjustment may possibly cause offset failure particularly when a highly colored original is copied in the Photo mode Also it may cause degradation in the color reproducibility Excessively enhancing the tint of black makes other colors such as skin tones look dull Therefore carefully perform the adjustment while checking the copy image Q Remarks Enter a value within the recommended val
179. hanging the hue of color areas This adjustment will be effective only if a file created on a general application such as Microsoft Office is printed It may not be effective if a file created on a graphic application e g Illustrator or a DTP application e g QuarkXPress is printed or a PDF file created on these applications is printed For Windows PcLe Ps3 Open the property page of the printer driver Press the Setting button in the Image Quality tab This adjustment will have an effect only on Auto or Color mode printing Unmark the Pure Gray checkbox in the Basic tab Setting Basic Color Balance Image Attribute Custom Color Settings r Halftone Resolution di Auto x 600dpi Use Black for All Text Distinguish Thin Lines FN Pure Black Apply to Auto X Apply to VW Black Over Print Text amp Graphic Restore Defaults e STUDIO5520C 6520C 6530C 2008 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved 3 18 3 Printer specific Adjustments For Macintosh am This adjustment will have an effect only on full color printing Open the print dialog box Select Black Auto from among the Pure Black and Gray options The menu to select varies according to the operating system Refer to the table below and select the menu OS Menu 10 2 x Printer Features gt Feature Sets Color settings 2 Pure Black and Gray 10 3 x
180. he Use Sharpness Filter checkbox in the Image Attribute tab Always set Uncheck Setting 1 or a smaller value may provide blurred print images Setting Basic Color Balance Image Attribute Contrast Brightness 4 f 4 mj gt Background Adjustment eee 4 j d m Saturation 4 p E Er V Use Sharpness Filter 4 f 4 Restore Defaults Sharpness adjustment is not available when 1200 dpi is selected for PS3 printer driver e STUDIO5520C 6520C 6530C 2008 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved 3 44 3 Printer specific Adjustments For Macintosh am This adjustment will have an effect only on full color printing Enter the adjustment code 05 Change the values for codes 8110 to 8113 and 8118 to 0 to change the sharpness setting OFF Image Acceptable mmen quality 05 code Subcode oa ake value Default type range General 05 8110 0 1 2 Photo 05 8111 0 1 2 Auto Color Presentation 05 8112 0 1 2 Line art 05 8113 0 1 2 Black 05 8118 0 1 2 Change the value to 0 0 to 255 Subcode Original Text Graphics Image Note When the setting value of this code is changed to 0 the sharpness adjustment on the Windows menu is also changed to OFF automatically When the setting value of this code is larger than 128 default the level of the sharpness intensity is equivalent to the one when the value is set w
181. he Value list to select a proper value In the Full color mode Paper type Color to adjust 08 code Subcode Y yellow 0 M magenta C cyan 08 2514 K black Y yellow Thick 3 4 M magenta Special 1 2 C cyan K black Thick 1 2 Full color 08 2546 In the Black mode Paper type Color to adjust 08 code Subcode Plain paper 1 2 K single color 08 2515 K single color When thick Thick 1 to 4 paper is used in the Black 08 2514 mode K single color When Special 1 2 special paper is used in the 08 2546 Black mode 08 2515 is available for e STUDIO6530C only The table below shows you the acceptable paper weight for the paper type Paper type Acceptable paper weight Thick 1 106 to 163 g m Max 60 Ib Cover Full color Thick 2 164 to 209 g n Max 110 Ib Index Black Thick 3 210 to 256 g n Max 140 Ib Index Thick 4 257 to 300 g n Max 110 Ib Cover Full color Special 1 Water resistant paper CoLaCa Black Special 2 Glossy paper Eco crystal e STUDIO5520C 6520C 6530C 2008 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved 1 6 1 General Adjustments Copying Printing and e Filing Output from Box Code setting values Correction value for developer bias Density of the solid colored output area Value automatically set 80 Light Value automatically set 60 T
182. he drum and transfer belt unit and replace them if necessary When replacing any consumable use steps a to b a Enter the PM support mode Reset the counter corresponding to the replaced consumable to 0 For further information regarding the PM support mode refer to the Service Handbook b Perform automatic calibration For further information regarding the procedures refer to procedure 1 in 1 1 To Obtain a Darker Image After replacing any consumable remember to reset the counter corresponding to it to 0 Otherwise it may cause a loss in MFP performance including degradation in the image quality and a reduction in the life of the consumables While replacing any consumable also check the slit glass in the laser optical unit and thoroughly clean it if it is soiled e STUDIO5520C 6520C 6530C 2008 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved 1 19 1 General Adjustments Copying Printing and e Filing Output from Box Q Caution after the adjustment The adjustment may possibly slow down the copying or printing speed extend the warm up time when the MFP is returned from the auto power save mode and shorten the life of the consumables because of an increase in the number of times image quality control is performed Therefore carefully perform the adjustment while checking the copy or print image Note the following when you print in thick paper mode in step 3 Printing
183. he life of consumables e STUDIO5520C 6520C 6530C 2008 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved 1 18 1 General Adjustments Copying Printing and e Filing Output from Box E HUE 3 Use the thick paper mode when you print on plain paper If the thick paper mode is used printing decelerates but image quality becomes more stable because differences in color or temperatures during continuous printing will be reduced Set the thick paper mode following steps a to 1 below a Press the USER FUNCTIONS button on the Control Panel to enter the User Functions menu b Press the USER tab c Press DRAWER in the USER menu d Select a drawer that you want to set for thick paper mode and paper size e Press PAPER TYPE f Press THICK 1 g Enter the adjustment mode 05 Then select the subcode 1 for the code 2934 and change the setting value to 3 Change the level of transfer roller bias offset in the color mode the front side of paper Check how the copy image changes carefully The setting value may be changed to 4 or 2 if required h Place paper to be used on the drawer that you selected in step d above 1 Perform automatic calibration Refer to step 1 in 1 1 To Obtain a Darker Image After setting the value print and check the image quality If further image quality adjustment is necessary go to the next step WU M 4 Check the life of the consumables particularly t
184. he next procedure 5 Enter adjustment mode 05 Decrease the values for codes 648 649 925 7102 and 7103 to make the text darker improving faint text or thin lines Recommended Acceptable value value range Original mode 05 code Text Photo 05 648 Text 05 649 User custom 05 925 ACS Black Text Photo ACS Black Text Default Set a value smaller 05 7102 than 2 05 7103 Set the value in increments of approximately 1 while checking the copy image until the optimum value is obtained After increasing the copy density copy and check the copy image quality If further image quality adjustments are still necessary use the next procedure lE 6 Enter adjustment mode 05 Change the values for codes 590 to 592 and 7956 to 7959 to adjust the gamma balance in each of medium and high density areas SER Recommended Acceptable Original mode 05 code Subcode valu value range Text Photo 05 590 Text 05 591 Photo 05 592 Image smoothing 05 7956 ACS Black Set a value larger Text Photo abd than 128 ACS Black Text ACS Black Photo Default 0 to 255 05 7958 05 7959 Set the value in increments of approximately 20 while checking the copy image until the optimum value is obtained Please be careful because the gradation or density of the medium density area may exceed that of the high
185. he registration motor in accordance with a pattern for the out of registration colors Use steps a to b to perform the adjustment a Enter adjustment mode 05 Select code 483 Finely adjust the rotating speed of the registration motor Adjust the values in accordance with a pattern for the out of registration colors as shown in the table below Pattern for Outer 05 code Subcode Recommended value registration colors Acceptable value range Default 123 to 127 Set a value smaller than 128 129 to 132 Set a value larger than 128 Pattern A Pattern B b After performing registration control print out the test print pattern to check whether the misaligned colors have been improved For further information regarding the adjustment procedures refer to procedures 3 and 4 Repeatedly use procedures 3 to 5 as necessary to select a proper value Hint When subcode 0 is adjusted for code 05 483 the correlation between the paper feeding speed and rotating speed of the transfer belt will be corrected in every paper mode However when colors are misaligned on an image printed in the thick paper mode after the adjustment for subcode 0 adjust subcode 3 during deceleration in the thick paper mode For subcode 3 use the steps and recommended values for subcode 0 Paper for printing a test print pattern will only be fed from the drawer Load the desired numbe
186. hoto images is stored in the Photo reduce moir mode moir is likely to occur Q Explanation When an original such as a magazine article containing full color photo images is copied in the Full color mode with the Photo mode selected and stored in the e Filing box Copy to Box moir is likely to occur on the photo images It may also occur when it is copied on paper But it will be more enhanced if it is stored as image data Select the Printed image mode from among the original mode options in order to store full color photo images while minimizing moir Please remember that the e Filing functions are available only on the Windows platform and not on the Macintosh or UNIX platform Q Procedures Both the service technician and the user can perform all adjustments e STUDIO5520C 6520C 6530C O 2008 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved 4 5 4 e Filing specific Adjustments Copy to Box This adjustment will have an effect only on images stored in the Full color mode M 1 Press the BASIC tab on the Touch Panel and then select PRINTED IMAGE from the original modes The procedure to be used varies depending on cases when the original mode is set for each job set without templates when a template is used or when the default original mode is changed If you want to scan only a particular job in the Printed image mode refer to To Set Original Mode for Each Job without Templates If you change the or
187. iginal mode according to the type or the purpose of the original refer to To Scan Originals Using Template If you change the default original mode in order to scan the original in the Printed image mode automatically refer to To Change Default Original Mode To Set Original Mode for Each Job without Templates Press the BASIC tab on the Touch Panel and select PRINTED IMAGE as an original mode To Scan Originals Using Template Recall a template whose original mode is set at PRINTED IMAGE to make a copy t is recommended to use a template if you want to change the original mode setting according to the type or the purpose of the original to be scanned First you must register the original mode settings as a template then use it as required so that you will be able to switch the original mode easily For how to use templates or details about templates refer to the Copying Guide and the TopAccess Guide To Change Default Original Mode on Touch Panel Use steps a to d to change the default original mode a Press the USER FUNCTIONS button on the Control Panel to enter the User Functions menu b Press the USER tab c Press the COPY button d Press the PRINTED IMAGE button of the ORIGINAL MODE FOR COLOR option To Change Default Original Mode in Setting Mode 08 Enter the setting mode 08 Change the value for the code 585 to 2 to change the default original mode a mode automatically selected when
188. ile checking the scanned in image Remarks Use the following steps to change the default compression rate and resolution options a Press the USER FUNCTIONS button on the Control Panel to enter the User Functions menu b Press the USER tab c Press the SCAN button d In the COMPRESS or RESOLUTION option press the button corresponding to the desired compression rate or resolution option The default resolution can be selected on a color mode basis Full color mode including the Auto color mode Gray scale mode and Black mode The following resolution options are available as the default Full color mode including the Auto color mode 600 400 300 200 150 100 dpi Gray scale mode 600 400 300 200 150 100 dpi Black mode 600 400 300 200 150 100 dpi e STUDIO5520C 6520C 6530C 2008 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION AII rights reserved 5 2 5 Scanning specific Adjustments 5 2 To Scan an Original while Eliminating the Background Color To eliminate the background density Before the adjustment After the adjustment TOSHIBA COPIER DEMONSTRATION CHART B 1 TOSHIBA COPIER DEMONSTRATION CHART B 1 x Function Automatic Exposure Control Function Automatic Exposure Control XTHE TOSHIBA TIMES XTHE TOSHIBA TIMES sc HOW MANY DINOSAURS HOW MANY DINOSAURS DOYOUKNDW DO YOU KNOW The background color of the original is also The background color
189. ill be optimized for printing on paper This is the reason why the image stored in the e Filing box looks slightly different in the color balance from the original displayed on the computer monitor Change the Image Quality Type setting on the printer driver in order to minimize the difference in the color balance and closely match the color balance of the image stored with that of the original Please remember that the e Filing functions are available only on the Windows platform and not on the Macintosh or UNIX platform Q Procedures Both the service technician and the user can perform all adjustments This adjustment will have an effect only on the image stored in the Auto mode or Print to Box PCLsc PS3 the Color mode MI 1 Open the property page of the printer driver Select General from among the Image Quality Type options in the Image Quality tab General allows the image to be stored in colors which are closely matched with the original compared to the other Image Quality Type options amp TOSHIBA e STUDIO6530CSeries PS3 Printing Preferences Basic Finishing Paper Handling Image Quality Effect Others Print Job Normal Prt Je a Qualty Type Profile Name EI Photograph E Presentation A E Line Art gt Advanced Graphics Profile None v v Restore Defaults Q Caution after the adjustment Nothing in particula
190. ill change the sharpness intensity when the Sharpness indicator in the IMAGE menu is set to the center Remember that 1 step of the indicator will increase or decrease the sharpness intensity by 25 If the sharpness intensity of the center value is changed each step of the indicator will be changed accordingly For instance if the center value is increased by 25 sharper the value of each step of the indicator will also be increased by 25 sharper e STUDIO5520C 6520C 6530C 2008 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved 2 6 mE 4 IIl 5 2 Copier specific Adjustments The values adjusted for the sharpness intensity are shared in the Full color mode with the Printed image mode selected and in the Black mode with the Photo mode selected Therefore adjusting the copy image quality in either of the modes affects that in the other mode Perform copy image quality adjustment in the mode that is used for the adjustment while checking the one in the other mode After increasing the sharpness intensity copy and check the copy image quality If further image quality adjustments are still necessary use the next procedure Enter adjustment mode 05 Change the values for codes 1630 to 1633 to adjust the maximum color density of the text Color to adjust Y Yellow M Magenta C Cyan K Black Set the value in increments of 1 while checking the copy image until the optimum value is obtained Acceptabl
191. im ad minim veniam quis nostrud exercitation ullam coi nderits im volupate velite illum parariatur Monnumy ejusmod tempor inciunt ut labore et dolore magna aliquam erat volupat Ut enim ad minim veniam quis nostrud exercitation ullam 93 94 95 96 97 98 99 i Copy m Hanc ego cum tene sententiam Adipiscing consecterur sed diam Auam multa vitiose and non distriv et indicat on ingenion Sumde enim bon et malute puew utra Monnumy ejusmod tempor inciunt ut labore et dolore magna aliquam erat volupat ad minim veniam quis nostrud exercitation ullam corpor nderits im volupate velite illum dolore feu fugiat null parariatur Monnum ejusmod tempor inciunt ut labore et dolore magna aliquam erat volupat Ut enim ad minim veniam quis nostrud exercitation ullam corpor nderits im volupate velite illum dolore feu fugiat null parariatur labore et dolore magna aliquam erat volupat Ut enim ad minim veniam quis nostrud exercitation ullam coi nderits im volupate velite illum ejusmod tempor inciunt ut labore et dolore magna aliquam erat volupat Ut enim ad minim veniam quis nostrud exercitation ullam 93 94 95 96 97 98 99 i Copy Wi Hanc ego cum tene sententiam Adipiscing consecterur sed diam Auam multa vitiose and non distriv et indicat on ingenion Sumde enim bon et malute puew utra Monnumy ejusmod tempor inciunt ut labore et dolore magna aliquam erat volupat Ut enim ad minim veniam quis nostrud exercitation ullam corp
192. ing to the print option to be applied PDL and Halftone Ex When printing on Windows is performed with the following options selected PCL6 Color Twin color Details RED Halftone Auto gt Text area Change the values for Y 05 8062 M 05 8063 and K 05 8065 gt Graphic and image area Change the values for Y 05 8058 M 05 8059 and K 05 8061 When printing on Macintosh is performed with the following option selected Color Type Black amp Green Halftone Smooth gt Change the values for Y 05 8050 C 05 8052 and K 05 8053 Printing on Macintosh is performed in PostScript See the PS3 row in the table below ae Default Color to PDL 05 Subcode Recommended Valus adjust code value rande Y us Yellow Detail 05 8046 Smooth 05 8059 M Set a value larger RENE ne increase the Ha Detail 05 8047 0 to 256 Se aie s 128 to decrease the dy Detail 05 8048 Smooth 05 8061 E las Set the value in increments of approximately 20 while checking the printouts until the optimum value is Black obtained e STUDIO5520C 6520C 6530C 2008 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved 3 101 3 Printer specific Adjustments The color to be adjusted varies according to the color color to be used for the area other than black selected in the Twin color mode Refer to the table below and select the color to be adjusted Selected color Color to be adjusted Red Gree
193. inguish Thin Lines l Toner Save Image Type General H Black Over Print Text and Graphics EZ Pure Black and Gray Black and Gray Auto Z Qo PDFv Preview Cancel C Print After changing the setting on the printer driver menu print the image and check its image quality If further image quality adjustment is necessary the service technician shall use the following procedure because the color of the text of the original file may not be set as black e STUDIO5520C 6520C 6530C 2008 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved 3 68 3 Printer specific Adjustments Applicable only to 1200dpi Bl 2 Enter the adjustment mode 05 Increase the setting value of the code 8242 to increase the density level of thin lines by emphasizing them Acceptable value range 0to5 Default PDL 05 code Subcode Recommended value PS3 Set value larger than 3 1200dpi Eds Set value larger than 1 Note When the setting value of the color adjustment is increased thin lines in light colors in printing at 1200 dpi may turn out darker than at 600 dpi For example when a 3D object such as Word Art is printed at 1200 dpi the border lines may become darker After setting the value print the image and check its image quality If further image quality adjustment is necessary use the following procedure Applicable only to 1200 dpi Bl 3
194. inimize moir the resolution of the copy image may decrease Q Caution after the adjustment Nothing in particular Q Remarks Enter a value within the recommended value range mentioned in the procedures Otherwise it may cause a loss in MFP performance including degradation in the image quality e STUDIO5520C 6520C 6530C 2008 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved 2 40 2 Copier specific Adjustments 2 9 To Copy Sharply To enhance sharpness Before the adjustment The image looks light and blurred on the copy The edges are enhanced and the copy image becomes sharper Q Explanation Perform adjustment regarding image processing sharpness intensity in order to obtain a sharper copy image when a light or blurred original is copied Q Procedures You can start with any of the procedures But it is recommended to perform the procedures in order as listed below You can use one procedure in conjunction with another But if this changes the image quality more than required or loses the effectiveness of the adjustment restore the settings made in the previously used procedure to the original ones Then use other procedures Both the service technician and the user can use procedures 1 and 2 Only the service technician must use procedure 3 Ml 1 Press the IMAGE button on the Control Panel Press the ONE TOUCH ADJUSTMENT button Press the CLEAR button After selecting
195. ion options by default If noise occurs in a resolution of 200 dpi select a higher resolution 300 dpi 400 dpi or 600 dpi After changing the resolution scan the original and check the scanned in image quality If further image quality adjustments are still necessary use procedure 1 3 Enter the setting mode 08 Change the value for the code 8304 to change the JPEG compression ratio Compression ratio Recommended Acceptable value range value Set a value smaller than 128 for higher compression ratio Standard 08 8304 0 to 255 Set a value larger than 128 for lower compression ratio 08 code Subcode Default High quality Low quality Q Caution after the adjustment The adjustment of the compression rate or resolution may possibly increase the size of the file to be stored Therefore carefully perform the adjustment while checking the scanned in image quality The table below shows you the correlation between a resolution and file size The ratio of the file size may vary depending on the type of original Therefore use the table below just for your reference The file size in a resolution of 200 dpi is 1 Resolution File size ratio 200 dpi 1 300 dpi Approx x 2 400 dpi Approx x 3 600 dpi Approx x 8 If the resolution selected in procedure 2 is too high moir may possibly occur in the scanned in image Therefore carefully adjust the resolution wh
196. is adjustment is effective when you do not copy the dark color of the background of an original a Enter the adjustment mode 05 Change the values for codes 7236 and 7237 to make the range correction operation fixed The code to be set differs depending on the density mode Select the 05 code for the target original mode and change the value to 0 Recommended Acceptable range value Original Default mode Density mode 05 code Automatic 05 7236 MR Manual 05 7237 Sr i Explanation for setting values Setting Range correction value operation 0 Fixed 1 Varied e STUDIO5520C 6520C 6530C 2008 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved 2 74 2 Copier specific Adjustments To increase the sharpness intensity This adjustment is effective when you want to copy light text thin lines or illustrations more clearly a Enter the adjustment mode 05 Change the value of the code 922 to adjust the default value for the sharpness intensity Accepta Recommended ble Default Color mode Original mode 05 code value range value Set a value larger User custom than 128 0 to 255 129 to 228 Note Ifthe setting value is too large Moir may appear To copy text or lines more clearly a Enter the adjustment mode 05 Increase the value for the code 925 to make the text and lines darker improving faint text or thin lines Recommended
197. is eliminated allowing scanned Therefore no clear contrast is made clear contrast between the background and between the background and image image Q Explanation When an original with a background is scanned such as a newspaper and colored paper the background color is also scanned Therefore no clear contrast is made between the background and image Perform background adjustment in order to clearly scan such originals This adjustment will have an effect on the image scanned in all color modes However the adjustment procedure 3 in adjustment mode 05 cannot be performed in the Gray scale mode and the Black mode Q Procedures You can start with any of the procedures But it is recommended to perform the procedures in order as listed below You can use one procedure in conjunction with another But if this changes the image quality more than required or loses the effectiveness of the adjustment restore the settings made in the previously used procedure to the original ones Then use other procedures Both the service technician and the user can use procedure 1 and 2 Only the service technician must use procedure 3 1 Set the density adjustment method to the automatic adjustment by pressing the AUTO button of the EXPOSURE option E HUE 2 When scanning the original press the COMMON SETTING button on the Control Panel Press the BACKGROUND ADJUSTMENT button Press the button to decrease th
198. ith any of the procedures But it is recommended to perform the procedures in order as listed below You can use one procedure in conjunction with another But if this changes the image quality more than required or loses the effectiveness of the adjustment restore the settings made in the previously used procedure to the original ones Then use other procedures Both the service technician and the user can use procedure 1 Only the service technician must use procedure 2 W 1 Change the threshold for the Auto Color mode Follow steps a through d to perform the adjustment a Press the USER FUNCTIONS tab on the Control Panel to enter the User Functions menu b Press the USER button c Press the COPY button d Change the threshold with the ACS ADJUSTMENT indicator If you move the indicator to the left the original tends to be judged as a black original If you move it to the right the original tends to be judged as a color original Hint The relation between the position of the ACS ADJUSTMENT indicator and the judgment result is shown below In the actual adjustment the threshold varies depending on the shape and size of the original or the density level of the original image Therefore use the table below only as a reference m Ly esol tas No of stamps No of red characters indicator value 230 Approx 10 judged as color Approx 100 190 Approx 5 judged as color Approx 60 150 Approx 3
199. ithin a range of 0 to 4 on the printer driver menu When the setting value of this code is smaller than 128 the level of the sharpness intensity is equivalent to the one when the value is set within a range of 4 to 1 on the printer driver menu Note that when the setting value of this code is 0 the image quality will not be changed even if the value is changed on the printer driver menu e STUDIO5520C 6520C 6530C 2008 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved 3 45 3 Printer specific Adjustments 2 Change the Background adjustment option on the printer driver For Windows PcLe Ps3 J Open the property page of the printer driver and press Setting button in the Image Quality tab And then This adjustment will have an effect only on Auto or Color mode printing set the Background Adjustment option in the Image Attribute tab within the range of 1 to 4 Setting Basic Color Balance Image Attribute Contrast T T T Brightness fP 4 Background Adjustment 4l 4 gt i Saturation 4 A 4 o 4 r7 gt NW Use Sharpness Filter 4 f 4 Restore Defaults Cancel Help Q Caution after the adjustment The adjustment in procedure 1 may possibly provide insufficient photo contrast images Therefore carefully perform the adjustment while checking the printouts e STUDIO5520C 6520C 6530C 2008 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved 3 46
200. judged as color Approx 40 Approx 2 judged as color Approx 20 Approx judged as color Approx 10 Approx 1 2 judged as color Approx 6 Approx 1 2 judged as black 4 or more Position of indicator 0 in the table above denotes the left end of the indicator the original is judged as black most and 6 denotes the right end of the indicator the original is judged as color most Adjustment value This refers to the judgment threshold for the Auto Color mode The adjustment value of the code in step 2 below will be added to this value The diameter of the standard stamp is approx from 8 mm to 12 mm In this field the number of the stamps on the chart and its judgment result are described The size of the standard red character is approx 10 5 pt In this field the number of the red characters entered and its judgment result are described After specifying the original size and copy size copy and check the copy image quality If further image quality adjustments are still necessary the service technician must use the next procedure e STUDIO5520C 6520C 6530C 2008 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved 2 64 2 Copier specific Adjustments I 2 Enter adjustment mode 05 Change the values for code 1675 to adjust the threshold value in the Auto color mode As the set value is increased the original will be more likely to be recognized as black and white On the other
201. justment mode 05 Change the values for codes 590 to 592 to adjust the gamma balance in each of the low and medium density area Original mode Accept Recommended able Default value value range 05 code Subcode Text Photo Text 05 590 0 1 05 591 0A Seta ir cR than 0 to 255 Photo 05 592 0 1 Set the value in increments of approximately 20 while checking the copy image until the optimum value is obtained Note that gradations density level in the medium and high density areas may be reversed with some setting values Since the subcode varies according to the area where the density is adjusted refer to the table below and set the appropriate subcode Remember that mainly adjusting the low or medium density area will change the copy density of the images seen through the back of the page Setting 2 for the subcode will allow you to adjust the high density area But this will not solve the problem Therefore never change the value for the high density area Subcode Area where the density is adjusted 0 Low density area 1 Medium density area Q Caution after the adjustment The adjustment may possibly cause text handwritten with a pencil or light text to become illegible on the copy Therefore carefully perform the adjustment while checking the copy image Q Remarks Enter a value within the recommended value range mentioned in the pro
202. k 1 Thick 2 Thick 3 OHP 05 2934 Special 1 Special 2 Recycled paper Thick 4 Plain paper Thick 1 Thick 2 Thick 3 OHP 05 2935 Special 1 Special 2 Recycled paper Thick 4 Plain paper Thick 1 Thick 2 Thick 3 OHP 05 2936 Special 1 Special 2 Recycled paper Thick 4 Plain paper Thick 1 Thick 2 Thick 3 OHP 05 2937 Special 1 Special 2 Recycled paper Thick 4 Full color DIU BR O ID IR Oo oo 1 DA HIB WIN oO lo ISBD ID IR IO oo ON BR ID ID Front refers to the printed side in the simplex mode or the side that is delivered facing upwards in the duplex mode Back refers to the printed side that is delivered facing downwards in the duplex mode e STUDIO5520C 6520C 6530C 2008 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved 1 3 1 General Adjustments Copying Printing and e Filing Output from Box The table below shows you the acceptable paper weight for the paper type Paper type Acceptable paper weight Plain paper 64 to 105 g m 16 to 20 Ib Bond Thick 1 106 to 163 g n Max 60 Ib Cover Thick 2 164 to 209 g m Max 110 Ib Index Thick 3 210 to 256 g n Max 140 Ib Index Thick 4 257 to 300 g n Max 110 Ib Cover Afte
203. k and white mode printing Select Detail from among the Halftone options in the Basic tab Setting Basic Color Balance Image Attribute Custom Color Settings a Halftone Resolution Er Detail M ES 600dpi CS pi M Use Black for All Text Distinguish Thin Lines Restore Defaults Cancel Help e STUDIO5520C 6520C 6530C 2008 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved 3 56 For Macintosh 3 Printer specific Adjustments am This adjustment will have an effect only on Black and white mode printing Open the print dialog box Select Detail from among the Halftone options The menu to select varies according to the operating system Refer to the table below and select the menu Os Menu 10 2 x Printer Features gt Feature Sets Color settings 1 gt Halftone 10 3 x 10 4 x 10 5x Color Settings 1 gt Halftone Printer TOSHIBA e STUDIO6530C aa Presets Standard Ez Color Settings 1 w E M Distinguish Thin Lines Toner Save Color Type Color E Resolution 600 dpi Halftone Detail Hd Image Type General t Black Over Print Text and Graphics Hd Pure Black and Gray Black and Gray Auto E Q PDFv Preview Cancel Print After changing the option on the printer driver print and check the print image qu
204. l Panel Select Custom from among the original mode options Q Caution after the adjustment Nothing in particular e STUDIO5520C 6520C 6530C 2008 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved 5 21 Imaging Manual Esrupio5520c 6520c 6530c TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION
205. l Scale Same as Original Size 100 25 400 Paper Source Auto X Paper Type Plain Auto X Letter E S Piper of Lopes Graphics Tent Profile None Save Profile Delete Restore Defaults fr Ex 1 3999 Orientation li Fa Portrait Landscape Cancel e STUDIO5520C 6520C 6530C 2008 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved 3 103 3 Printer specific Adjustments M 2 Change the Sharpness option on the printer driver For Windows PcLe Ps3 J Open the property page of the printer driver Press the Setting button in the Image Quality tab Set the value for Sharpness within a range of 4 to 4 or to OFF in the Image Attribute tab Setting Basic Color Balance Image Attribute Contrast Brightness 4 f Bl gt Background Adjustment 4 DN e STUDIO5520C 6520C 6530C 2008 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved 3 104 3 Printer specific Adjustments 3 24 3 To Print a Full Color Original in Two Colors To adjust the boundary between black and colors other than black I 1 Enter adjustment mode 05 Change the values for codes 8213 to 8215 to adjust the boundary between black and colors other than black As the set value is increased the area of CHANGE BLACK TO will become larger On the other hand if the value is decreased the area of SECOND C
206. l color mode Copy An adjustment having an effect on copying in the Auto color mode Scan An adjustment having an effect on scanning in the Auto color mode An adjustment having an effect on printing with the Windows PCL6 emulation printer driver An adjustment having an effect on printing with the Windows PS3 emulation printer driver An adjustment having an effect on printing with the Windows PSX emulation printer driver An adjustment having effect on printing with the Macintosh printer driver An adjustment having an effect on an image stored in the e Filing box by the scanning functions including Scan to Box Scan to File and Scan to E mail An adjustment having an effect on an image stored in the e Filing box by the copying functions Copy to Box An adjustment having an effect on an image stored in the e Filing box by the printing functions Print to Box An adjustment having an effect on an image stored in the e Filing box by the Fax and Internet Fax functions including Received Fax to Box and Received Internet Fax to Box Table of Contents 1 General Adjustments Copying Printing and e Filing Output from Box 1 1 1 2 1 3 1 4 1 5 To Obtain a Darker Image cs 1 1 To Adjust the Density on a Solid Colored Image 1 5 To Achieve the Image Quality Most Suitable for the Paper Used To eliminate blur and graininess from an image 1 10 To Minimize Variations in the I
207. lack in the Red and black mode or the boundary between black and colors other than black Refer to the procedure corresponding to the user s particular request e STUDIO5520C 6520C 6530C 2008 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved 2 66 2 Copier specific Adjustments 2 16 1 To Adjust the Tint of Colors other than Black Both the service technician and the user can perform all adjustments M 1 Press the IMAGE button on the Control Panel Press the TWIN COLOR COPY button Select the Twin color copy mode from among the twin color copy mode options To select Red and black mode Press the RED amp BLACK button To select the Twin color selectable mode Use steps a through d to select the Twin color selectable mode a Press the TWIN COLOR SELECTABLE button b Press the CHANGE BLACK TO button Press the button for the desired color c Press the SECOND COLOR button Press the button for the desired color d Press the ENTER button Use procedure 2 M 2 Press the ADJUST button Press the button or the button for the color to be adjusted in order to adjust the tint of colors other than black n the Red and black mode Press the button to decrease yellow and the button to enhance magenta in order to enhance the tint of red Press the button to enhance yellow and the button to decrease magenta in order to decrease the tint of red n the Twin color selecta
208. lam 93 94 95 96 97 98 99 The hues of highlighters are not accurately The areas marked with 2 different colored reproduced The areas marked with 2 different highlighters are accurately reproduced colored highlighters are reproduced in the and distinguishable on the copy same hue They are indistinguishable Q Explanation When an original containing text or areas marked with highlighters is copied their hues may sometimes not be accurately reproduced on the copy The inks of highlighters are special Therefore their hues cannot be accurately reproduced To reproduce the hues of similar highlighters such as yellow and green while producing sharp contrasts on the copy perform color adjustment color balance adjustment or RGB adjustment and color density adjustment e STUDIO5520C 6520C 6530C 2008 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved 2 54 2 Copier specific Adjustments Q Procedures You can start with any of the procedures But it is recommended to perform the procedures in order as listed below You can use one procedure in conjunction with another But if this changes the image quality more than required or loses the effectiveness of the adjustment restore the settings made in the previously used procedure to the original ones Then use other procedures Both the service technician and the user can use procedures 1 and 3 Only the service technician must use procedures 2 and 4 Ul 1 Press the IMA
209. ling Image Quality Effect Others Print Job Normal Print z EJ Image Quality Type Profile Name s General EI EI Photograph E Presentation e il Line Art Letter LE LS Graphics Text r Profile None h Restore Defaults v e STUDIO5520C 6520C 6530C 2008 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved 3 125 3 Printer specific Adjustments E M 2 Select the desired profiles on RGB Source Profile CMYK Source Profile or Profile of the Destination Profile option Setting Basic Color Balance Image Attribute Advanced Source Profiles RGB Source Profile 9 SourceRGB_v10 KA CMYK Source Profile 2 SourceCMYK_v10 iv Apply to Device Color Only Destination Profile a Profile E OutputCMYK_v10 v Rendering Intent C Perceptual Relative Colorimetric C Saturation Absolute Colorimetric Restore Defaults Update Now Cancel Help PS3 J XPS E I 3 Open the Color Balance tab menu and then change each setting items to obtain the desired color balance Setting Basic Color Balance Image Attribute Advanced All Colors Each Color Detail Restore Defaults e STUDIO5520C 6520C 6530C 2008 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved 3 126 E 3 Printer specific Adjustments M 4 Open the Image Attribute tab menu and then change each setting items to obtain the desi
210. lity in the Full Color Mode 2 35 To Eliminate Molir 2 1 terrenae nc nana aset reato nona naar eaten a ern cena rnnr sued 2 37 To Copy Sharply To enhance sharpness 2 41 To Make Photo Edges Look Softer un 2 44 To Make Solid Filled Bold Text Logo Highly Colored 2 49 2 11 1 To Adjust the Copy Image Quality of a Black Logo 2 50 2 11 2 To Adjust the Copy Image Quality of a Colored Logo 2 52 To Sharply Contrast the Hues of Highlighters on the Copy 2 54 To Obtain a Good Color Balance on Thick Paper 2 57 To Obtain Smooth Gray Scale Photo Images 2 61 To Change the Threshold in Auto Color Mode To change the threshold between the Full Color mode and the Black mode to meet the user s needs meme 2 63 e STUDIO5520C 6520C 6530C 2008 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved Table of Contents 2 16 2 17 2 18 2 19 2 20 2 21 To Adjust the Twin Color Copy Image Quality 2 66 2 16 1 To Adjust the Tint of Colors other than Black esses 2 67 2 16 2 To Adjust the Reproducibility of Black in the Red and Black Mode 2 68 2 16 3 To Adjust the Boundary between Black and Colors other than Black 2 69 To Adjust the Image Quality Scanned from the RAD
211. ll be changed accordingly For instance if the center value is decreased by 5 lighter the value of each step of the indicator will also be decreased by 5 lighter Q Caution after the adjustment The adjustment may possibly diminish the quality of the light colored image Therefore carefully perform the adjustment while checking the scanned in image Remarks When scanning the original use the following steps to change the default indicator position in the background adjustment option which is displayed on the Control Panel a Press the USER FUNCTIONS button on the Control Panel to enter the User Functions menu b Press the USER tab c Press the SCAN button d Press the Next button twice to display the screen to change the default values in the Full color mode and the Auto color mode e Select the default background density in the BACKGROUND ADJUSTMENT option e STUDIO5520C 6520C 6530C O 2008 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION AII rights reserved 5 4 5 Scanning specific Adjustments 5 3 To Clearly Scan and Print an Original in Black and White To improve gradation and reduce graininess Before the adjustment After the adjustment If the original is scanned in the Black mode The halftones of the scanned in image are the halftones may become blurred in black clearly printed out Q Explanation If an original is scanned in the Black mode a difference in the density level of the halftones c
212. ll color Printed image 05 1087 Photo 05 1088 Gray scale 05 843 Setting 0 provides the softest image while setting 255 provides the sharpest image Q Caution after the adjustment The adjustment may possibly cause moir In addition when text and thin lines in a light colored background are scanned the background around the text or line may be eliminated Therefore carefully perform the adjustment while checking the scanned in image e STUDIO5520C 6520C 6530C 2008 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved 5 14 5 Scanning specific Adjustments 5 6 To Scan an Original while Enhancing Black Before the adjustment After the adjustment o gen Geer Sgen one Par L TOSHIBA COLOR CHART TOSHIBA COLOR CHART Black is not dark enough compared to the Black is enhanced and closely matched with original the original hue Q Explanation When a full color original is scanned black is not dark enough compared to the original In general the scanned in image is likely to become less dark Finely adjust the black density of the scanned in image in order to darken black and closely match it with the original hue This adjustment will have an effect only on the image scanned in the Full color mode including the Auto color mode e STUDIO5520C 6520C 6530C 2008 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved 5 15 5 Scanning specific Adjustments Q
213. lors of text or a thin line are sometimes printed out of alignment Perform color registration control in order to print or copy without out of registration colors Q Procedures The service technician must perform the adjustment in accordance with the procedure below 1 Make sure that no out of registration colors are visible on an original 2 Check the direction in which colors are misaligned This adjustment is intended to correct misaligned colors due to differences between the paper feeding speed and rotating speed of the transfer belt Therefore it will be effective only if colors are misaligned in the paper feeding direction or the secondary scanning direction This adjustment cannot improve misaligned colors in the direction perpendicular to paper feeding or primary scanning or in the secondary scanning direction periodically partially at regular intervals Refer to Troubleshooting for the Image 1 Color deviation in the Service Manual 3 Enter adjustment mode 05 and print out the test print pattern to correct out of registration colors a Enter adjustment mode 05 select code 4719 and then press the START button Registration control will be forcibly performed b Enter code 104 corresponding to a desired test print pattern Press the FAX button Paper is fed from the drawer to print out a test print pattern Test print pattern Papersize No of copies Test print pattern for identifying A3 L
214. lue Text Photo 05 1688 Automatic offsetting Text 05 1689 adjustment for Printed image 05 1690 background processing Photo 05 1691 Map 05 1692 Text Photo 05 1698 Manual offsetting Text 05 1699 adjustment for Printed image 05 1700 background processing Photo 05 1701 Map 05 1702 Set a value smaller than 128 The value for automatic offsetting adjustment for background processing will be applied only if the automatic copy density mode is selected On the other hand the value for manual offsetting adjustment for background processing will be applied only if the manual copy density mode is selected Set the value in increments of approximately 10 while checking the copy image until the optimum value is obtained The value for the code corresponding to the original mode Text Photo Text or Printed image will affect the copy image quality in the Full color mode and the Auto color mode The value adjusted for the background density is shared in the Full color mode with the Printed image mode selected and in the Black mode with the Photo mode selected Therefore adjusting the copy image quality in either of the modes affects that in the other mode Perform copy image quality adjustment in the mode that is used for the adjustment while checking that in the other mode e STUDIO5520C 6520C 6530C 2008 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved 2 35 2 Copier specifi
215. mage The sharpness adjustment will have an effect particularly on photo images such as BMP GIF JPEG and TIFF e STUDIO5520C 6520C 6530C 2008 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved 3 40 3 Printer specific Adjustments Q Procedures Both the service technician and the user can perform all adjustments M 1 Change the Sharpness option on the printer driver For Windows Open the property page of the printer driver Press the Setting button in the Image Quality tab J This adjustment will have an effect only on Auto or Color mode printing Uncheck the Use Sharpness Filter checkbox in the Image Attribute tab To make a smoother image check its checkbox and then set the value within a range of 1 to 4 Setting 4 provides the smoothest softest print image Setting Basic Color Balance mage Attribute Contrast Brightness m Background Adjustment 4 4 gp Saturation Sharpness adjustment is not available when 1200 dpi is selected for PS3 printer driver e STUDIO5520C 6520C 6530C 2008 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved 3 41 3 Printer specific Adjustments For Macintosh EED This adjustment will have an effect only on full color printing Open the print dialog box Set the value for Sharpness within a range of 1 to 4 Setting 4 provides the smoothest softest print image The menu to select varies according to the operating
216. mage Quality under the Operating Conditions To optimally program image quality control 1 15 To Correct Out of Registration Colors enti 1 21 2 Copier specific Adjustments 2 1 2 2 2 3 2 4 2 5 2 6 2 1 2 8 29 2 10 2 11 2 12 2 13 2 14 2 15 To Copy Text Clearly To eliminate faint smudged or blurred text 2 1 2 1 1 To Adjust the Copy Image Quality in the Black Mode 2 2 2 1 2 To Adjust the Copy Image Quality in the Full Color Mode 2 6 2 1 3 To Adjust the Copy Image Quality in the Auto Color Mode 2 9 To Closely Match the Color Balance of the Original 2 12 To Improve the Reproducibility of Gray 2 16 To Copy in Vivid Colors eo mens 2 18 To Make the Pale Area of the Original Look Darker and Sharper To improve the highlight reproducibility 2 22 To Eliminate the Background Color eee 2 25 2 6 1 To Adjust the Copy Image Quality in the Black Mode 2 26 2 6 2 To Adjust the Copy Image Quality in the Full Color Mode 2 28 To Avoid Copying the Image Seen through the Back of a Page Printed on Thin Paper 2 31 2 7 1 To Adjust the Copy Image Quality in the Black Mode 2 32 2 7 2 To Adjust the Copy Image Qua
217. ment After the adjustment Color has always boen an important part of lie and is a 4 Color has always heen an important part of life and is becoming more and more important in business documents B A le be used to organize material adding a logical sequence and conti inl i malty to reports proposals or any multi page business document munity to reports proj is or any multi page business document A poster flyer form graph or chart will demand more attention A poster Myer form graph or chart will demand more attention if color is incorporated into its design Color can establish a recur if color is incorporated into its design Color can establish a weur ring theme increasing brand recognition and can help arrange ring theme increasing brand recognition and can help arrange facts in a clear and logical fashion Focus attention Enlighten facts in a clear and logical fashion Focus attention Enlighten Explain Porsaade Use color Explain Persuade Use color If the original is scanned in the Full color The image quality is maintained while noise mode or the Gray scale mode noise may occur is being reduced in text or edges of a solid filled area Q Explanation When an original is scanned in the Full color or the Gray scale mode the data compression may cause noise toner scattering around text or the edges of a solid filled area Adjust the compression rate or change the scan resolution in order to o
218. n Y Yellow M Magenta C Cyan D OMNE d Green Low Ef EN MENU eee Sn Bue 0 T v7 h v Po Cyn 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 00 0 Y Magna J 0 0 0 00 0 0 0 0v Halftone refers to how halftones are printed Two options are available Smooth which is intended to improve the reproducibility of gradation and Detail which is intended to print halftones in detail with the high frequency The halftone option to be applied in printing can be selected from among the Halftone options on the printer driver Windows or in the print dialog box Macintosh Auto is selected from among the Apply to options by default It is intended to automatically select Smooth or Detail in accordance with Apply to of the halftone option the selected Color and Image Quality Type options as described by the table below Color and Image Quality Type options Apply to Auto Color Black and Twin General Photograph White Color Graphic Illustration Smooth Smooth Smooth Detail Smooth Smooth line etc Image Photograph Smooth Smooth Smooth Detail Smooth Smooth etc The subcode varies depending on the area where the density is adjusted Refer to the table below and set the subcode for the area to be adjusted Area where the density is adjusted Low density area Medium density area High density area Note This adjustment changes the values set in the MFP Therefore
219. n must use the next procedure e STUDIO5520C 6520C 6530C 2008 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved 2 19 2 Copier specific Adjustments IE 1 4 Enter adjustment mode 05 Change the values for codes 1779 to 1798 to adjust the color density Color to Acceptable f Default adjust value range Original mode 05 code Subcode Recommended value Text Photo 05 1779 0 1 2 Text 05 1780 0 1 2 Printed image 05 1781 0 1 2 Photo 05 1782 0 1 2 Map 05 1783 0 1 2 Text Photo 05 1784 0 1 2 Text 05 1785 0 1 2 Printed image 05 1786 0 1 2 Y Yellow M Magenta Photo 05 1787 0 12 Set a value larger than 128 Map 05 1788 0 1 2 to increase the density Text Photo 05 1789 0 1 2 Text 05 1790 0 1 2 Printed image 05 1791 0 1 2 Photo 05 1792 0 1 2 Map 05 1793 0 1 2 Text Photo 05 1794 0 1 2 Text 05 1795 0 1 2 Printed image 05 1796 0 1 2 Photo 05 1797 0 1 2 Map 05 1798 0 1 2 0 to 255 Set a value smaller than 128 to decrease the density Black Set the value in increments of approximately 10 while checking the copy image until the optimum value is obtained The value for the code corresponding to the original mode Text Photo Text or Printed image will affect the copy image quality in the Full color mode and the Auto color mode The subcode varies according to the area where the density is adjusted Refer to
220. n on the Control Panel Press the D button to increase the copy density After increasing the copy density copy and check the copy image quality With the copy density set to the maximum if further image quality adjustments are still necessary use the next procedure I 2 Press the IMAGE button on the Control Panel Press the SHARPNESS button Press the SHARP button to increase the sharpness intensity After increasing the sharpness intensity copy and check the copy image quality With the sharpness intensity set to the maximum if further image quality adjustments are still necessary the service technician must use the following procedures I 3 Enter adjustment mode 05 Increase the values for codes 1737 to 1741 to strengthen the copy density of text or increase the sharpness intensity The code to use varies depending on the original mode Text Photo Text Printed image Photo or Map Adjust the value for 05 code corresponding to the original mode in which you would like to improve the image quality and set values larger than 128 for codes 05 1737 to 1741 Original mode 05 code Recommended value Acceptable value range Default Text Photo 05 1737 Text 05 1738 Printed image 05 1739 Set a value larger than 128 0 to 255 Photo 05 1740 Map 05 1741 Setting 0 provides the softest image while setting 255 provides the sharpest image Changing the values for these codes w
221. n to print out the test chart j Place the printed test chart on the original glass k Press the START button to perform calibration When the calibration comes to an end the message Scanning and calibrating will disappear 1 The message Is a result made to reflect will appear Press the YES button e STUDIO5520C 6520C 6530C 2008 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved 3 5 3 Printer specific Adjustments 3 3 To Obtain the Desired Color Balance Before the adjustment After the adjustment The natural color balance is obtained The desired color balance is obtained Ex Yellowness 1s enhanced Q Explanation If you would like to change the color balance or darkness of the printouts and reproducibility of halftones in accordance with a type of original or the user s requirements change the Image Quality Type option on the printer driver or adjust the color balance Q Procedures Perform the adjustment in accordance with the procedures below Both the service technician and the user can use procedures 1 and 2 Only the service technician must use procedure 3 e STUDIO5520C 6520C 6530C 2008 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved 3 6 3 Printer specific Adjustments M 1 Change the Image Quality Type option on the printer driver For Windows PCL6 Ps3 xPs This adjustment will have an effect only on Auto or Color mode printing Open the property page of the printer dri
222. nitor because the range of colors reproducible in toner colors is narrower than the one on the monitor e STUDIO5520C 6520C 6530C 2008 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved 3 16 3 Printer specific Adjustments 3 5 To Maintain a Uniform Gray Hue To maintain Consistency in Gray among Text Photos and Graphics Before the adjustment After the adjustment Photo area Photo area Text area CAM Ww Text area TOSHIBA How gray is reproduced varies depending on All color toners are used to reproduce gray the type of original As a result there are As a result consistency is maintained in the variations in gray gray hue Q Explanation For printing only the K toner is usually used to reproduce gray areas of drawing data lines and text On the other hand all color toners C M Y and K are used to reproduce gray areas of image data such as BMP GIF JPEG and TIFF This provides a deeper gray on the printouts Change the option on the printer driver in order to maintain consistency in the gray hue between the drawing data and the image data e STUDIO5520C 6520C 6530C 2008 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved 3 17 3 Printer specific Adjustments Q Procedures Both the service technician and the user can perform all adjustments Ml 1 Change the Pure Gray option on the printer driver Pure Gray allows gray areas to always be reproduced using all color toners C M Y and K without c
223. nsity in the toner save mode The 05 code to use varies depending on whether to adjust the image quality on Full Color or Twin Color printing or on Black and White printing Use either of the procedures below corresponding to the type of original to print To adjust the image quality in Full Color or Twin Color printing Auto Color or Twin Color is selected from among the Color options on the PCL6 or PS3 or XPS printer driver Auto Color or Twin Color is selected from among the Color Type options on Macintosh The Color options are available in the Basic tab on the PCL6 PS3 and XPS printer drivers The Color Type options are available in the Color Settings 1 menu in the print dialog box on Macintosh a Enter adjustment mode 05 Change the value for codes 1055 or 8161 to adjust the upper limit of the image density in the toner save mode Printing on Macintosh is performed in PostScript See the PS3 row in the table below Recommended Acceptable Default value value range Resolution 05 code Subcode Set a value smaller than 176 to decrease the density 05 1055 0 to 255 Set a value larger 05 1055 than 176 to increase the density Set a value smaller than 176 to decrease the density 05 1055 05 8161 1200dpi 05 8161 Set a value larger 05 8161 than 176 to increase the density Set the value in increments of appro
224. nt Nothing in particular e STUDIO5520C 6520C 6530C 2008 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved 5 18 5 Scanning specific Adjustments 5 8 To Register the Original Mode Optimal for a Particular Type of Original To have Custom selected Q Explanation If the value for 05 code is adjusted in existing original mode Text Photo Text Photo Printed image Photo or Gray scale in order to clearly scan a particular type of original other types of original may not be clearly scanned In this case add the original mode option adjusted for a particular type of original as Custom User custom mode To have Custom selected add the value adjusted for 05 code in Custom mode to the one in reference original mode Select reference original mode for Custom from among the original mode options To have Custom in the Black mode select the existing original mode option as reference original mode To have Custom in the Full color mode including the Auto color mode selected select the existing original mode or e document mode option where the value has been adjusted to identify whiteout areas as reference original mode This adjustment will have an effect only on the image scanned in the Black mode or the Full color mode including the Auto color mode Q Procedures Perform the adjustment in accordance with the procedures below Only the service technician must use procedures 1 and 2 Both the s
225. nter value is decreased by 25 softer the value of each step of the indicator will also be decreased by 25 softer However the range of adjustment values that is valid for sharpness level change is from 100 to 100 of the total of the setting value of the adjustment code and that of the indicator For instance if the setting value of the adjustment code is 103 25 from the default value the limit of the steps in the soft side of the indicator is 3 If the step is set at 4 the image quality will not be changed 4 3 2 1 0 H 2 3 4 Soft Sharp Default 100 50 50 25 0 25 50 75 100 4 Assigned adjustment value of sharpness Setting value 103 i99 100 75 50 25 0 25 50 75 Since 25 is assigned to the center the image quality remains the same even if the indicator is changed from 3 to 4 lt Note gt Minimizing the edges of the copy image and Sharpening the copy image are mutually contradictory When the adjustment is performed to minimize the edges the resolution of the copy image may decrease After decreasing the sharpness intensity copy and check the copy image quality If further image quality adjustments are still necessary use the next procedure e STUDIO5520C 6520C 6530C 2008 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved 2 46 2 Copier specific Adjustments M D 4 Enter adjustment mode 05 Change
226. nu is set to the center Remember that 1 step of the indicator will increase or decrease the sharpness intensity by 25 If the sharpness intensity of the center value is changed each step of the indicator will be changed accordingly For instance if the center value is increased by 25 sharper the value of each step of the indicator will also be increased by 25 sharper The adjustment value for color mode will be adopted if the original is judged as color with the ACS function After setting the value copy and check the image quality If further image quality adjustment is necessary go to the next step e STUDIO5520C 6520C 6530C 2008 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved 2 9 2 Copier specific Adjustments Ul 4 Enter the adjustment mode 05 and adjust the gamma balance in each of medium and high density areas Recommende Acceptable Default d value value range Original mode 05 code Subcode Text Photo 05 590 Text 05 591 Photo 05 592 ACS Black Text Photo ACS Black Text ACS Black Photo 05 7957 Set a value larger than 128 Dion 05 7958 05 7959 Area where the density is adjusted Medium density area High density area Subcode Set the value in increments of approximately 20 while checking the copy image until the optimum value is obtained Note that gradations density level in the medium and high density areas may be reversed with
227. o 05 1782 0 1 2 Map 05 1783 0 1 2 User custom 05 7980 0 1 2 Text Photo 05 1784 0 1 2 Text 05 1785 0 1 2 M Printed image 05 1786 0 1 2 ee Mm EE a Set a value larger than 128 User custom 05 7981 0 1 2 increase the density Text Photo 05 1789 0 1 2 Text 05 1790 0 1 2 Printed image 05 1791 0 1 2 Photo 05 1792 0 1 2 Map 05 1793 0 1 2 User custom 05 7982 0 1 2 Text Photo 05 1794 0 1 2 Text 05 1795 0 1 2 K Printed image 05 1796 0 1 2 Black Photo 05 1797 0 1 2 Map 05 1798 0 1 2 User custom 05 7983 0 1 2 0 to 255 Set a value smaller than 128 to decrease the density Set the value in increments of approximately 10 while checking the copy image until the optimum value is obtained e STUDIO5520C 6520C 6530C 2008 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved 2 59 2 Copier specific Adjustments The value for the code corresponding to the original mode Text Photo Text or Printed image will affect the copy image quality in the Full color mode and the Auto color mode The subcode varies according to the area where the density is adjusted Refer to the table below and set the subcode for the area to be adjusted Subcode Area where the density is adjusted Low density area Medium density area High density area Q Caution after the adjustment Nothing in particular Q Remarks Enter a v
228. o step 1 in 1 1 To Obtain a Darker Image Hint The smaller the setting value the lower the fusing temperature becomes It is usually recommended that the set value be decreased in order to suppress roughness on the high density area of the image Adjust the value within the range of the recommended values while checking the image carefully because if it 1s too small insufficient fusing may occur Since temperatures on the long side of the paper cannot be kept in a proper balance the same value must be set for the 08 codes 5293 and 5294 unless otherwise required so After setting the value print and check the image quality If further image quality adjustment is necessary go to step 3 e STUDIO5520C 6520C 6530C 2008 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved 1 13 1 General Adjustments Copying Printing and e Filing Output from Box UE 3 Check the life of the consumables particularly the drum and transfer belt unit and replace them if necessary When replacing any consumable use steps a to b a Enter the PM support mode Reset the counter corresponding to the replaced consumable part to 0 For further information regarding the PM support mode refer to the Service Manual b Perform automatic calibration For further information regarding the procedures refer to procedure 1 in 1 1 To Obtain a Darker Image After replacing any consumable remember to reset the counter
229. o the relevant information in the Service Manual and Service Handbook e STUDIO5520C 6520C 6530C 2008 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved 1 14 1 General Adjustments Copying Printing and e Filing Output from Box 1 4 To Minimize Variations in the Image Quality under the Operating Conditions To optimally program image quality control Before the adjustment After the adjustment The image contrast varies depending on the The image quality is constantly maintained date and time when copying or printing is performed or the type of job e STUDIO5520C 6520C 6530C 2008 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved 1 15 1 General Adjustments Copying Printing and e Filing Output from Box Q Explanation The image contrast may vary depending on the date and time when copying or printing is performed or the type of copy print job To constantly maintain image quality shorten the waiting period until image quality control is performed Q Procedures The service technician must perform the adjustment in accordance with the procedures below MW 1 Enter setting mode 08 Change the value for code 570 571 572 or 2508 to specify the best interval during which image quality control should be performed according to use of the MFP The MFP is installed in a place where the temperature and humidity vary widely Make adjustment by either of the following procedures A or B
230. of Import new Profile to select a file for the profile Then click Import Maintenance Destination Profiles Defautt Profile OutputCMYK_v10 MS_OP_A00 icc S peser us sheetted Coated v2 USSheetfedCosted icc o ro uen e Click Previous The display returns to the ICC Profile submenu f Click Save A confirmation dialog box is displayed g Click OK For the details of TopAccess see the TopAccess Guide e STUDIO5520C 6520C 6530C 3 113 2008 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved 3 Printer specific Adjustments PS3 J xPS D Image Quality tab menu Then click Setting TOSHIBA e STUDIO6530CSeries PS3 Printing Preferer Basic Finishing Paper Handling Image Quality Effect Others nces I 3 Open the Properties page of the printer driver and then select Advanced on the Image Quality Type option on the Print Job Normal Print X ded Image Quality Type Profile Name J General Photograph Presentation Line Art Advanced Profile None Save Profile Delete Restore Defaults E Setting Basic Color Balance Image Attribute Advanced Source Profiles RGB Source Profile a ScuceRGB v10 SourceRGB v10 Adobe RGB 1998 IV Apply to Device Color Only M 4 Select the uploaded RGB profile on RGB Source Profile on the Advanced tab menu
231. of Original To have Custom selected 5 19 e STUDIO5520C 6520C 6530C 2008 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved 1 General Adjustments Copying Printing and e Filing Output from Box 1 1 To Obtain a Darker Image Before the adjustment After the adjustment The output image looks light and blurred The output image looks darker and sharper Q Explanation When an original containing photo images or gradational images is printed the output image sometimes looks light and blurred Perform image quality control or automatic calibration and adjust the transfer roller bias output in order to obtain a darker and sharper image Q Procedures Perform the adjustment in accordance with the procedures below Both the service technician and the user can use procedure 1 Only the service technician must use procedures 2 and 3 E UU 1 Perform automatic calibration to correct variations in image density ADMIN is selected from among the CALIBRATION DISPLAY LEVEL options by default In other words an administrator is authorized to operate automatic calibration But USER can also be selected to allow the user to operate it Refer to the User Functions Guide for further information regarding how to select the CALIBRATION DISPLAY LEVEL option e STUDIO5520C 6520C 6530C 2008 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved 1 1 1 General Adjustments Copying Printing and e Filing Output
232. olor Settings V Save Current Settings as a Name Draft agenda Unginal Image Wualty Type Presentation y c Halftone Resolution Auto ES 600dpi Y Use Black for All Text Distinguish Thin Lines V Pure Black Apply to V Pure Gray Auto zl Apply to MW Black Over Print Text amp Graphic v Restore Defaults DK Cancel Help Lote Hop e STUDIO5520C 6520C 6530C 2008 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved 3 95 3 Printer specific Adjustments After registering the name open the property page of the printer driver Make sure that the name created for the Image Quality Type option in the Image Quality tab has been registered The icon of the base Image Quality Type will be displayed in the background of the icons for the registered Custom Color Settings The icon of Presentation is displayed in the background as illustrated below TOSHIBA e STUDIO6530CSeries PS3 Printing Preferences r i u Basic Finishing Paper Handling Image Quality Effect Others Print Job Normal Print 7 El Image Quality Type Profile Name Es General q E Line Art Advanced Photograph Presentation Letter EL LS i Graphics 1 Text I Profile None C Restore Defaults Er Draft agenda 1 I v Q Caution after the adjustment The Custom Color Settings indicate a condition where the def
233. on The menu to select varies according to the operating system Refer to the table below and select the menu OS Menu 10 2 x Printer Features gt Feature Sets Color settings 4 gt Brightness 10 3 x 10 4 x 10 5x Color Settings 2 gt Brightness Printer TOSHIBA e STUDIO6530C P e Presets Standard HJ Color Settings 2 Color Balance Cyan 0 Magenta 0 Image Attribute Sharpness 0 Q PDFw Preview Cancel Print Q Caution after the adjustment Nothing in particular Q Remarks The brightness adjustment does not affect black text CMY 100 K 100 or RGB 0 e STUDIO5520C 6520C 6530C 2008 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved 3 26 3 Printer specific Adjustments 3 8 To Adjust the Overall Saturation The image is printed with a natural saturation Default printing After the adjustment j T The saturation is decreased The saturation is increased Q Explanation The saturation of the print image can be easily adjusted by changing the Saturation option on the printer driver e STUDIO5520C 6520C 6530C 2008 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved 3 27 3 Printer specific Adjustments Q Procedures Both the service technician and the user can use procedure 1 Only if the saturation of R Red is still insufficient even after procedure 1 has been used must the service technician use p
234. opy image looks darker and sharper even on thick paper Q Explanation When image looks light on paper that is different from usual paper perform automatic calibration for each paper type to obtain the optimum image quality Q Procedures You can start with any of the procedures But it is recommended to perform the procedures in order as listed below You can use one procedure in conjunction with another But if this changes the image quality more than required or loses the effectiveness of the adjustment restore the settings made in the previously used procedure to the original ones Then use other procedures Only the service technician must use procedures 1 2 and 4 Both the service technician and the user can use procedure 3 e STUDIO5520C 6520C 6530C 2008 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved 2 57 2 Copier specific Adjustments E EE D 1 Perform automatic calibration for each paper type to correct variations in image density A privilege to perform automatic calibration is set to Administrator by default but this can be changed to the User For how to change the privilege refer to the MFP Management Guide Follow steps a through j to perform the automatic calibration a Enter the setting mode 08 Change the value of the code 9059 to 1 so that automatic calibration for each paper type will be enabled Value for 08 9059 Display for user calibration 0 Not displayed defa
235. or nderits im volupate velite illum dolore feu fugiat null parariatur Monnumy ejusmod tempor inciunt ut labore et dolore magna aliquam erat volupat Ut enim ad minim veniam quis nostrud exercitation ullam corpor nderits im volupate velite illum dolore feu fugiat null parariatur labore et dolore magna aliquam erat volupat Ut enim ad minim veniam quis nostrud exercitation ullam corpor nderits im volupate velite illum parariatur Monnumy ejusmod tempor inciunt ut labore et dolore magna aliquam erat volupat Ut enim ad minim veniam quis nostrud exercitation ullam 93 94 95 96 97 98 99 Wi Hanc ego cum tene sententiam Adipiscing consecterur sed diam Auam multa vitiose and non distriv et indicat on ingenion Sumde enim bon et malute puew utra Monnumy ejusmod tempor inciunt ut labore et dolore magna aliquam erat volupat Ut enim ad minim veniam quis nostrud exercitation ullam corpor nderits im volupate velite illum dolore feu fugiat null parariatur Monnumy ejusmod tempor inciunt ut labore et dolore magna aliquam erat volupat Ut enim ad minim veniam quis nostrud exercitation ullam corpor nderits im volupate velite illum dolore feu fugiat null parariatur labore et dolore magna aliquam erat volupat Ut enim ad minim veniam quis nostrud exercitation ullam coi nderits im volupate velite illum parariatur Monnumy ejusmod tempor inciunt ut labore et dolore magna aliquam erat volupat Ut enim ad minim veniam quis nostrud exercitation ul
236. orrection setting To make the outline of text thinner and finer Set a value larger than 5 To check the amount changed with this setting it is recommended to set the value at 2 or 3 first to decrease it and then to set the value at 7 or 8 first to increase it Then check the copy image and increase or decrease the value further so that the image will be adjusted finely After changing the value perform automatic calibration Refer to step 1 in 1 1 To Obtain a Darker Image to perform automatic calibration Q Caution after the adjustment Performing this adjustment on thin lines may not give satisfactory results In this case it is recommended to perform the adjustment in conjunction with 3 14 To Clearly Print Light Colored Thin Lines or Text However the service technician shall judge whether or not the adjustment is to be performed in conjunction with 3 14 To Clearly Print Light Colored Thin Lines or Text after checking the printed image In some consumption conditions background fogging or a decrease in the amount of developer material carrier streaks may occur Therefore carefully perform the adjustment while checking the printed image U Remarks If you perform only step 4 above changing the setting value of the code 08 2548 as an image quality adjustment for a certain color it may cause an extra increase or decrease in the amount of the toner used for this
237. ou p have the supplies and strategy you need to Simulate Ink Black Simulate Paper White deal with an emergency ge Ink Manager Things to have for Show All an emergency You may be on your own for a minimum of 72 hours following a natural disaster or Preview Color Warnings other emergency Police fire and paramedics may be unable to respond to every need Be prepared to manage without their assistance Separations Electricity water telephone and natural gas service may be disrupted Utilities may be unavailable for many days Water At least 2 gallons of water per person per day for the time you plan for Replace stored water every 6 months Secure water heater with plumber strapping Liquids from canned food ice and toilet reservoirs will be safe Food Keep at least a 1 week supply of food on hand and rotate it into your regular pantry every 6 months Store foods with high nutritional value that are easily prepared Remember special dietary needs and keep pets in mind too First Ald It is vital that you know basic first aid Medical facilities may be overwhelmed and possibly difficult to reach Take a Red Cross first aid I4 4 ue e STUDIO5520C 6520C 6530C 2008 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved 3 91 3 Printer specific Adjustments 3 22 To Prevent Dark Toner from Coming Off Before the adjustment After the adjustment County A M County B M County
238. outline of text thinner and finer Set a value larger than 5 To check the amount changed with this setting it is recommended to set the value at 2 or 3 first to decrease it and then to set the value at 7 or 8 first to increase it Then check the copy image and increase or decrease the value further so that the image will be adjusted finely After changing the value perform automatic calibration Refer to step 1 in 1 1 To Obtain a Darker Image to perform automatic calibration If further adjustments are necessary after performing step 5 you can repeat steps 1 to 4 When repeating these steps however adjust the value while checking the copy image carefully Q Caution after the adjustment The adjustment may possibly cause an increase in the amount of toner used moir blurred text small dark text blurred faint text fine outlines of text shredded diminished photo images or gradational images less accurate reproducibility of halftones or in some consumption conditions of consumables background fogging or a decrease in the amount of developer material carrier streaks Therefore carefully perform the adjustment while checking the copy image Q Remarks Enter a value within the recommended value range mentioned in the procedures Otherwise it may cause a loss in MFP performance including degradation in the image quality and a reduction in the life of the con
239. ow shows you the correlation between the value and image quality Advantage of image quality Reproducibility of edges Default Intermediate Intended to improve the reproducibility of photos more than the one obtained when 2 is set Intended to improve the reproducibility of photos L more than the one obtained when 3 is set Equivalent to the one obtained when the default value 0 is set Intended to improve the reproducibility of text more ih than the one obtained when 3 is set Intended to improve the reproducibility of text more than the one obtained when 4 is set Soft Intermediate For the User custom mode refer to step 1 in 2 8 To Eliminate Moir e STUDIO5520C 6520C 6530C 2008 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved 2 47 2 Copier specific Adjustments Q Caution after the adjustment When an original containing text is copied the adjustment may possibly cause the text to become blurred on the copy Therefore carefully perform the adjustment while checking the copy image Q Remarks Enter a value within the recommended value range mentioned in the procedures Otherwise it may cause a loss in MFP performance including degradation in the image quality e STUDIO5520C 6520C 6530C 2008 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved 2 48 2 Copier specific Adjustments 2 11 To Make Solid Filled Bold Text Logo Highly Colored Before the adjustment After the adjus
240. owever it is recommended to enter the same setting value for all the subcodes unless otherwise required Acceptable Default range value Setting item 08 code Subcode Recommended value To make the outline of text thicker and clearer Potential on printing Set a value smaller than 5 white text 08 2548 Correction setting To make the outline of text thinner and finer Set a value larger than 5 To check the amount changed with this setting it is recommended to set the value at 2 or 3 first to decrease it and then to set the value at 7 or 8 first to increase it Then check the copy image and increase or decrease the value further so that the image will be adjusted finely After changing the value perform automatic calibration Refer to step 1 in 1 1 To Obtain a Darker Image to perform automatic calibration If further adjustments are necessary after performing step 6 you can repeat steps 1 to 5 When repeating these steps however adjust the value while checking the copy image carefully Q Caution after the adjustment The adjustment may possibly cause an increase in the amount of toner used moir blurred text small dark text blurred faint text fine outlines of text shredded diminished photo images or gradational images less accurate reproducibility of halftones or in some consumption conditions of consumables background fogging or a decrease
241. ox Set the value for Sharpness within a range of 1 to 4 Setting 4 provides the sharpest print image Initially set 4 and check the printout If further image quality adjustments are still necessary refer to lt Hint gt to do this The menu to select varies according to the operating system Refer to the table below and select the menu OS Menu 10 2 x Printer Features Feature Sets Color settings 4 Sharpness 10 3 x 10 4 x 10 5x Color Settings 2 gt Sharpness lt Hint gt After changing the option on the printer driver print and check the print image quality Printer TOSHIBA e STUDIO6530C He Presets Standard L Color Settings 2 H Color Balance Cyan 0 l 5 Y 1 Yellow 0 Image Attribute Sharpness Contrast 0 Background Adjustment 0 PDF v Preview In addition to the sharpness adjustment decreasing Brightness moving to the side changing Contrast or increasing Saturation moving to the side may improve the image quality Magenta 0 i I i Black 0 Brightness 0 t i t f 1 Saturation 0 See Cancel If further image quality adjustments are still necessary use the next procedure e STUDIO5520C 6520C 6530C 2008 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved 3 52 Print 3 Printer specific Adjustments PCL6 PS3 X
242. p 05 1798 0 1 2 User custom 05 7983 0 1 2 Set the value in increments of approximately 10 while checking the copy image until the optimum value is obtained Set a value smaller than 128 to decrease the density The value for the code corresponding to the original mode Text Photo Text or Printed image will affect the copy image quality in the Full color mode and the Auto color mode The subcode varies according to the area where the density is adjusted Refer to the table below and set the subcode for the area to be adjusted Subcode Area where the density is adjusted Low density area Medium density area High density area Q Caution after the adjustment The adjustment may possibly vary the hues of areas including photo images and text other than those marked with highlighters Therefore carefully perform the adjustment while checking the copy image Remarks Enter a value within the recommended value range mentioned in the procedures Otherwise it may cause a loss in MFP performance including degradation in the image quality e STUDIO5520C 6520C 6530C 2008 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved 2 56 2 Copier specific Adjustments 2 13 To Obtain a Good Color Balance on Thick Paper Before the adjustment After the adjustment TOSHIBA TOSHIBA The copy image looks light on thick paper The c
243. per of paper used is obtained Q Explanation The image sometimes looks slightly blurred or grained on the copy or printout depending on the type of paper used Adjust the transfer roller bias output and the fuser temperature in order to achieve the image quality most suitable for the paper used Q Procedures All the steps in the adjustment must be performed by the service technician The procedure to be followed differs depending on the purpose as follows To adjust halftone image Go to step 1 To adjust images on the high density area only when recycled paper is used Go to step UIN 1 Enter adjustment mode 05 Change the values for codes 2934 to 3937 to adjust the transfer 2nd transfer roller bias output Adjust the offset voltage of transfer roller bias so as to optimize the halftones The code to use varies depending on the paper type Adjust the value for 05 code corresponding to the paper type for which you would like to improve the image quality Set the value within a range of 2 to 8 to optimize the halftones e STUDIO5520C 6520C 6530C 2008 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved 1 10 1 General Adjustments Copying Printing and e Filing Output from Box Recommended Acceptable Default value value range Paper type 05 code Subcode e Plain paper Thick 1 Thick 2 Thick 3 OHP 05 2934 Special 1 Special 2 Recycled paper Thick 4 Plain paper
244. plain paper 1 and 2 is as follows Paper type not available Acceptable paper weight Full color Plain paper 1 64 to 80g m Max 20 Ib Bond Plain paper 2 81 to 105g m Max 28 Ib Bond Do not use the following code corresponding to plain paper 1 and 2 for the adjustment Paper type Color to adjust 08 code Subcode Full color Black Plain paper 1 2 Y yellow M magenta C cyan K black 0 08 2513 I 2 3 When performing the adjustment in accordance with the procedure note that the density ofa gradation area halftone such as a photograph is adjusted as well as that of a solid colored image e STUDIO5520C 6520C 6530C 1 5 2008 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved 1 General Adjustments Copying Printing and e Filing Output from Box Q Procedures The service technician must perform the adjustment in accordance with the procedures below i 1 Enter setting mode 08 Change the value to adjust the density of a solid area during the copying printing operation Use steps a to b to perform the adjustment a Enter setting mode 08 Change the values for codes 2514 2515 2546 to adjust the developer bias output value The value to use varies depending on the paper type and color to adjust Check the code to use in accordance with the following Code list and refer to t
245. pness intensity or the button to decrease it The sharpness intensity is set to the center by default If moir occurs by default press the button to decrease the sharpness intensity After adjusting the sharpness intensity scan and store the original Then print and check the print image quality With the sharpness intensity set to the minimum if moir still occurs use other procedures Scan to Box ED 4 Enter adjustment mode 05 Change the values for codes 1086 to 1088 and 843 to adjust the sharpness intensity in the scanning functions This adjustment will have an effect only on an image stored in the Full color mode or the Gray scale mode Acceptable Default value range Color mode Original mode 05 code Recommended value Text 05 1086 Full color Printed image 05 1087 Photo 05 1088 Gray scale 05 843 Seta value smaller than 128 0 to 255 Text Photo 05 840 Black Setting 0 provides the softest image while setting 255 provides the sharpest image Q Caution after the adjustment When the original containing text and lines is scanned and printed the adjustment may possibly cause the blurred text and lines or a blend of undesired colors Therefore carefully perform the adjustment while checking the scanned in image or printout e STUDIO5520C 6520C 6530C 2008 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved 4 10 4 e Filing specific
246. ptimum value is obtained The subcode varies according to the area where the density is adjusted Refer to the table below and set the subcode for the area to be adjusted Subcode Area where the density is adjusted Low density area Medium density area High density area Q Caution after the adjustment The adjustment may possibly cause a dark colored area such as in a photo to become blurred on the copy Also it may also cause offset failure grained images and degradation in gradation Therefore carefully perform the adjustment while checking the copy image e STUDIO5520C 6520C 6530C 2008 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved 2 53 2 Copier specific Adjustments Before the adjustment 2 12 To Sharply Contrast the Hues of Highlighters on the Copy After the adjustment m Hanc ego cum tene sententiam Adipiscing consecterur sed diam Auam multa vitiose and non distriv et indicat on ingenion Sumde enim bon et malute puew utra Monnumy ejusmod tempor inciunt ut labore et dolore magna aliquam erat volupat Ut enim ad minim veniam quis nostrud exercitation ullam corpor nderits im volupate velite illum dolore feu fugiat null parariatur Monnumy ejusmod tempor inciunt ut labore et dolore magna aliquam erat volupat Ut enim ad minim veniam quis nostrud exercitation ullam corpor nderits im volupate velite illum dolore feu fugiat null parariatur labore et dolore magna aliquam erat volupat Ut en
247. ptions Auto Color General Photograph Presentation Line Art Black and White Twin Color Text Detail Detail Detail Detail Detail Detail Illustration line etc Graphic Smooth Smooth Smooth Detail Smooth Smooth Image Smooth Smooth Smooth Detail Smooth Smooth Photograph etc The subcode varies according to the area where the density is adjusted Refer to the table below and set the subcode for the area to be adjusted Subcode Area where the density is adjusted Low density area Medium density area High density area Note This adjustment changes the values set in the MFP Therefore it will affect every user who uses the printer by connecting it to the MFP After the adjustment the values changed will be applied to all printouts for the Image Quality Type and Halftone options For instance if the value for 05 code for PCL6 and Smooth is changed it will be applied to printing performed with PCL6 and Halftone Smooth or Auto selected Carefully perform the adjustment being aware that the image quality of all future printouts will be changed when printing out originals other than the one that is used for the adjustment Q Caution after the adjustment Nothing in particular e STUDIO5520C 6520C 6530C 2008 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved 3 13 3 Printer specific A
248. r e STUDIO5520C 6520C 6530C O 2008 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved 4 8 4 e Filing specific Adjustments 4 5 To Scan and Print while Minimizing Moir Before the adjustment After the adjustment When the image stored in the e Filing box is The image stored in the e Filing box can be printed moir is likely to occur printed while moir is minimized Q Explanation An original is scanned and stored in the e Filing box Scan to Box When the image stored is printed directly from the e Filing box moir may occur depending on the type of original Also it is likely to occur particularly when the original is scanned in the Full color mode or the Auto color mode in a high resolution 600 dpi or even in the Gray scale mode Select an appropriate scan resolution or adjust the sharpness intensity in the scanning functions in order to store the original and print it from the e Filing box while minimizing moir Q Procedures You can start with any of the procedures But it is recommended to perform the procedures in order as listed below You can use one procedure in conjunction with another But if this changes the image quality more than required or loses the effectiveness of the adjustment restore the settings made in the previously used procedure to the original ones Then use other procedures Both the service technician and the user can use procedures 1 to 3 Only the service technician must use
249. r CMYK ink series provided by each ink manufacturer are disclosed and distributed by some websites and some users want to make a simulated printing using one of these profiles This simulation is possible by using ICC profiles for CMYK ink of particular ink manufacturer as a CMYK source profile Q Procedures Both the service technician and the user can perform all settings MI 1 Create the desired printer profile using the ICC profile creation software I 2 Access TopAccess and open the Administration tab menu Then upload the desired CMYK source profile and printer profile Follow a to g below to upload the profiles a Access TopAccess and open the Administration tab menu b Open the Setup menu and the ICC Profile submenu Logout Device f Job Status f Logs f Registration Counter User Management Administration Setup Setup General Network Copier Save as file Email InternetFax Printer PrintServicdl ICC Profile i Version Save Cancel e STUDIO5520C 6520C 6530C 2008 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved 3 116 c Click Maintenance for the desired profile The Maintenance Destination Profiles page for the selected profile is displayed Administration Setup ICC Profile Profiles Setting RGB Source Profile Default Profile SourceRGB_v10 _ Maintenance _ Default Profile Default Profile Rendering Intent Perceptual Relative
250. r Destination Profile Profile q OutputCMYK_v10 LA r Rendering Intent C Perceptual Relative Colorimetric Saturation Absolute Colorimetric Restore Defaults Update Now Cancel Help e STUDIO5520C 6520C 6530C 3 114 2008 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved 3 Printer specific Adjustments BI 5 Select the uploaded printer profile on Profile ofthe Destination Profile option on the Advanced tab menu Setting Basic Color Balance Image Attribute Advanced Source Profiles RGB Source Profile SourceRGB_v10 e CMYK Source Profile a SoucecMYK vo E IV Apply to Device Color Only Destination Profile a Profile 1 OutputCMYK_v10 Renderi U S Sheetfed Coated v2 CP Euroscale Coated v2 Japan Color 2001 Coated elative L olonmetric C Saturation C Absolute Colorimetric Restore Defaults Update Now Q Caution after the adjustment Nothing in particular U Remarks Not all colors may be printed precisely because the color gamut reproducible with MFPs differs depending on the models The accuracy of color reproduction differs depending on printer profiles used e STUDIO5520C 6520C 6530C 2008 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved 3 115 E 3 Printer specific Adjustments 3 25 3 To Perform Simulated Printing with CMYK Inks of Each Ink Manufacturer Q Explanation ICC profiles fo
251. r adjusting the transfer roller bias output perform automatic calibration in the same manner as in procedure 1 Hint The transfer voltage increases as the set value is increased It is usually recommended that the set value be increased when you print on thick paper or paper with asperities on its surface On the other hand the set value should be decreased when you print on thin paper After adjusting the density print and check the image quality If further image quality adjustments are still necessary use the next procedure ipa 3 Check the life of the consumables particularly the drum and fuser unit and replace them if necessary When replacing any consumable use steps a to c a Enter the PM support mode Reset the counter corresponding to the replaced consumable to 0 For further information regarding the PM support mode refer to the Service Manual b Enter adjustment mode 05 select code 396 and then press the START button Image quality control will be performed and the image quality control value will be initialized c Perform automatic calibration in the same manner as in procedure 1 After replacing any consumable remember to reset the counter corresponding to it to 0 Otherwise it may cause a loss in MFP performance including degradation in the image quality and a reduction in the life of the consumables While replacing any consumable also check the slit glass in the laser optical
252. r can perform all adjustments M 1 Select Photograph from among the Image Quality Type options This adjustment will be effective only if a file created on a general application such as Microsoft Office is printed in PostScript PS3 XPS and Macintosh It may not be effective if a file created on a graphic application e g Illustrator or a DTP application e g QuarkXPress is printed or a PDF file created on these applications is printed using the C M Y and K toners Unmark the Use PostScript Passthrough checkbox in the PostScript Setting options in the Others tab The Image Quality Type option will be effective if printing on Windows PS3 is performed but not on Macintosh or if a file created on the above applications is printed However the color balance may be changed and also the image quality may be diminished depending on the type of file For Windows Open the property page of the printer driver Select Photograph from among the Image Quality Type 3 This adjustment will have an effect only on Auto or Color mode printing options TOSHIBA e STUDIO6530CSeries PS3 Printing Preferences Basic Finishing Paper Handling Image Quality Effect Others Print Job Normal Print z El Image Quality Type Profile Name General EW Presentation EJ Line Art di Letter LE E bl Advanced Graphics Text Profile Save Profile Delet o Seg O Dee Restore Defaults
253. r of sheets of thick paper in the drawer in order to print the test print pattern on thick paper Adjust subcode 0 and then subcode 3 in order to adjust only misaligned colors in the thick paper mode e STUDIO5520C 6520C 6530C 2008 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved 1 23 1 General Adjustments Copying Printing and e Filing Output from Box Q Caution after the adjustment Nothing in particular Q Remarks Enter a value within the recommended value range mentioned in the procedures Otherwise it may cause a loss in MFP performance including degradation in the image quality Out of registration colors cannot always be perfectly corrected this depends on the type of text or lines to print Also refer to the relevant information in the Service Manual for further information regarding color registration control procedures e STUDIO5520C 6520C 6530C 2008 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved 1 24 2 Copier specific Adjustments 2 1 To Copy Text Clearly To eliminate faint smudged or blurred text Before the adjustment After the adjustment The occurrence of errors has been Increasing gradually every year Duis aute irure repreheo nderit volupate Duis aute ikure repreheo nderit volupate 93 94 95 96 97 98 99 93 94 95 96 97 98 99 E Hanc ego cum tene sententiam Adipiscing consecterur sed diam Auam multa vitiose and non distriv et indicat on ingenion Sumde enim bon et malut
254. ral Adjustments Copying Printing and e Filing Output from Box Hint The transfer voltage increases as the set value is increased It is usually desirable that the set value be decreased to obtain a clearly highlighted area After performing the adjustment print and check the image quality If further image quality adjustment is necessary go to step 3 II W 2 If the image on the high density area looks grained on plain paper other than the TOSHIBA recommended one is used select recycled paper as a paper type To select the paper type refer to the Operator s Manual for Copying Guide f fine adjustment of image quality in the recycled paper mode is required in accordance with the paper type follow the steps from a to b below a Enter the adjustment mode 05 Change the value of the codes 2934 to 2937 to adjust 2nd transfer bias output In this step the transfer roller bias offset voltage 1s adjusted to print the high density area or the halftone area of the image most clearly Accepta Paper type 05 code ble value Default range 05 2934 0 to 10 Front Recycled paper Recycled Full color Back 05 2935 0 to 10 paper Recycled paper Recycled paper Front refers to the printed side in the simplex mode or the side that is delivered facing Front 05 2936 0 to 10 Back 05 2937 0 to 10 downwards in the duplex mode Back r
255. re 2 Press the BASIC button on the Control Panel Select IMAGE SMOOTHING from among the original mode options To have IMAGE SMOOTHING selected from among the original mode options by default refer to procedure 1 in 2 8 To Eliminate Moir Q Caution after the adjustment Nothing in particular e STUDIO5520C 6520C 6530C 2008 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved 2 62 2 Copier specific Adjustments 2 15 To Change the Threshold in Auto Color Mode To change the threshold between the Full Color mode and the Black mode to meet the user s needs Original OQ infinitalus green Employee Guide Benefits Summary Before the adjustment After the adjustment LOO infinitalus jener Employee Guide LOO infinitalus peru Employee Guide Benefits Summary Benefits Summary It is copied in the Full color mode Changing the threshold value will allow a colored original to be copied in the Black mode Q Explanation When the Auto color mode is selected it will be automatically determined whether an original is colored or black and white Then it will be copied in the Full color mode or the Black mode But adjust the threshold value in order to change the threshold between the Black mode and the Full color mode and suit the preferences of the user e STUDIO5520C 6520C 6530C 2008 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved 2 63 2 Copier specific Adjustments Q Procedures You can start w
256. reas of drawing data lines and text On the other hand all color toners C M Y and K are used to reproduce gray areas of image data such as BMP GIF JPEG and TIFF This provides a deeper gray on the printouts The following are examples when image data are reproduced using C M Y and K A gray scale or black and white photo is pasted in photo editing software such as Imaging and Paint Shop Pro in Internet Explorer word processing or spreadsheet software A semi transparent gray color or gradient of gray is used in the Format AutoShape dialog box on Microsoft Office The gray area printed out as raster data in the same manner as a photo image is reproduced using C M and Y toners or C M Y and K toners Change the option on the printer driver in order to use only the black toner to reproduce the gray area where C M Y and K are used as described above Q Procedures Both the service technician and the user can perform all adjustments e STUDIO5520C 6520C 6530C 2008 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved 3 20 3 Printer specific Adjustments I 1 Mark the Pure Gray checkbox on the printer driver Select Text Graphic amp Image from among the Apply to options Pure Gray allows gray areas to always be reproduced using only the K toner without changing the hue of color areas This adjustment will be effective only if a file created on a general application such as Microsoft Office is printed It
257. red image quality Setting Basic Color Balance Image Attribute Advanced Contrast Brightness Background Adjustment 4 E Saturation 0 Q Caution after the adjustment Nothing in particular e STUDIO5520C 6520C 6530C 4 4 Ki v Use Sharpness Filter p Restore Defaults 3 127 Cancel Help 2008 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e STUDIO5520C 6520C 6530C 2008 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved 3 128 4 e Filing specific Adjustments 4 1 To Clearly Store a B W Image in the Auto Color Mode National Museum gt a Wester Art Before the adjustment Tokya Metropolitan fag eho Tokyo Bunka Kaikan Hall The light image becomes blurred and text becomes illegible EE Even the light image is not blurred Text is clear and legible Q Explanation When a black and white original containing black and white photo images is scanned in the Auto color mode and stored in the e Filing box Scan to Box it is stored with binary data with reference to a threshold value This may make a dark area blurred and a light area eliminated Adjust the threshold value in order to clearly store the black and white original in the Auto color mode Please remember that the e Filing functions are available only on the Windows platform and not on the Macintosh or UNIX platform This adjustment will have an effect on the image s
258. res when printing is performed in the toner save mode Therefore carefully perform the adjustment while checking the printouts Q Remarks The print density in the toner save mode can also be adjusted For further information regarding the adjustment procedures refer to 3 18 To Adjust the Image Density in the Toner Save Mode e STUDIO5520C 6520C 6530C 2008 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved 3 73 3 Printer specific Adjustments 3 18 To Adjust the Image Density in the Toner Save Mode Before the adjustment After the adjustment Sales Contest Sales Contest Grand prize trip for two to the Cayman Islands Grand prize trip for two to the Cayman Islands The image density is too dark even when The image density in the toner save mode printing is performed in the toner save is adjustable as desired mode U Explanation The e STUDIO5520C 6520C 6530C offers a toner save mode It is intended to automatically decrease the image density and reduce the amount of toner used Adjust the upper limit of the image density in the toner save mode in order to obtain the desired image density requested by a particular user Q Procedures The service technician must perform all adjustments e STUDIO5520C 6520C 6530C 2008 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved 3 74 3 Printer specific Adjustments PcLe PS3 xes ED Bl 1 Enter adjustment mode 05 Change the value to adjust the image de
259. riented 1 Text oriented 1 Text oriented 2 e STUDIO5520C 6520C 6530C 2008 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved 2 80 To adjust gamma balance This adjustment is effective when you change the gamma balance of the copied image 2 Copier specific Adjustments a Enter the adjustment mode 05 Change the values for the codes 7980 to 7983 to adjust the gamma balance of each color Adjustme nt Original mode 05 code Recommend ed value Default Y Yellow M Magenta User custom 05 7980 05 7981 05 7982 05 7983 Set a value larger than 128 Set the value in increments of approximately 10 while checking the copy image until the optimum value is obtained Subcodes to be entered differ depending on the target density area Refer to the table below to enter the subcode for the area to be adjusted Subcode Area where the density is adjusted Low density area Medium density area Q Cautions after the adjustment Nothing in particular e STUDIO5520C 6520C 6530C High density area 2 81 2008 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved 2 Copier specific Adjustments 2 19 To Copy While Erasing Shadow Outside of Image Before the adjustment After the adjustment When originals such as books are copied an The shadow is erased area outside of the image is copied lik
260. river instead of a PCL6 printer driver Use Output Preview on Acrobat 7 0 Professional to examine the color definition on the PDF file For further information regarding the Output Preview refer to an appropriate manual or the Help menu of Acrobat 7 0 Professional e STUDIO5520C 6520C 6530C 2008 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved 3 90 3 Printer specific Adjustments 1 Open a PDF file on Acrobat 7 0 Professional 2 Select Output Preview in the Advanced menu 3 Select a profile from among the Simulation Profile options Select the profile to use for the Monitor Simulation in order to print RGB data and the one to use for the Ink Simulation in order to print CMYK data from among the Simulation Profile options 4 Move the cursor over the data to check the color definition Then the color calibration will be displayed in percentage on Separations 28 Adobe Acrobat Professional 12 Phone Book pdf IT File Edit View Document Comments Tools Advanced Window Help Emergency Preparedness With minimal preparation you can lessen the course and obtain a good medical emergency danger to yourself your family your home Kitand ouidabook Star ntialecacccintian and property in the case of a natural disaster Meera 1315 7 or other emergency Study this page obtain P the items you may not have on hand and then share your plans with your family and immediate neighbors You will feel better knowing y
261. rly If Line Art is selected Detail which is intended to print halftones in detail with the high frequency will be applied to graphics images and text from among the Halftone options After changing the option on the printer driver print and check the print image quality If further image quality adjustments are still necessary use the next procedure e STUDIO5520C 6520C 6530C 2008 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved 3 9 3 Printer specific Adjustments Ml 2 Change the Color Balance option the Brightness or Saturation option on the printer driver For Windows PCL6 PS3 JL This adjustment will have an effect only on Auto or Color mode printing Open the property page of the printer driver Press the Image Type Quality button in the Image Quality tab Change the option in the Color Balance or Image Attribute tab nitially change the value by 4 steps while checking the printouts until the optimum value is obtained Color Balance tab Change the All Colors or Each Color option Basic Color Balance Image Attribute Detail Restore Defaults Image Attribute tab Change the Brightness or Saturation option Basic Color Balance Image Attribute Contrast EET Q 4 m gt Brightness E 0 4 Saturation Use Sharpness Filter 4 4 Restore Defaults Cancel Help e STUDIO5520C 6520C 6530C 2008 TOSHIBA
262. rocedure 2 Ml 1 Change the Saturation option on the printer driver Select the desired value for saturation on a scale of 4 Palest to 4 Brightest For Windows PcL6 PS3 J Open the property page of the printer driver Press the Setting button in the Image Quality tab J This adjustment will have an effect only on Auto or Color mode printing Change the Saturation option in the Image Attribute tab Setting Basic Color Balance Image Attribute Contrast Brightness m Background Adjustment 4 mp Saturation 4 V Use Sharpness Filter 4 f Restore Defaults Cancel Help e STUDIO5520C 6520C 6530C 2008 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved 3 28 3 Printer specific Adjustments For Macintosh am This adjustment will have an effect only on full color printing Open the print dialog box Change the Saturation option The menu to select varies according to the operating system Refer to the table below and select the menu OS Menu 10 2 x Printer Features gt Feature Sets Color settings 4 gt Saturation 10 3 x 10 4 x 10 5x Color Settings 2 gt Saturation Printer TOSHIBA e STUDIO6530C HJ o Presets Standard HB Color Settings 2 Color Balance Cyan 0 Magenta 0 Yellow 0 Black 0 Image Attribute Sharpness 0 Brightness 0 Q9 PDFv C Preview Cancel
263. ser s particular request e STUDIO5520C 6520C 6530C 2008 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved 2 49 2 Copier specific Adjustments 2 11 1 To Adjust the Copy Image Quality of a Black Logo You can start with any of the procedures But it is recommended to perform the procedures in order as listed below You can use one procedure in conjunction with another But if this changes the image quality more than required or loses the effectiveness of the adjustment restore the settings made in the previously used procedure to the original ones Then use other procedures Both the service technician and the user can use steps 1 and 2 Only the service technician can use steps 3 and 4 Important Before you start this adjustment make sure that no color misalignment exists on the logos If there is any correct it before the adjustment For how to correct the color misalignment deviation refer to 1 5 To Correct Out of Registration Colors in this manual and also the Service Manual M D 1 Press the BASIC button on the Control Panel If you want to emphasize the reproducibility of text more select TEXT as an original mode If you want to emphasize that of photos select TEXT PHOTO f you want the TEXT or TEXT PHOTO mode to be the default original mode refer to step 1 in 2 8 To Eliminate Moir After selecting the Text mode copy and check the copy image quality If further image quality adju
264. ss the CALIBRATION button to print out the test chart h Place the printed test chart on the original glass 1 Press the START button to perform calibration When the calibration comes to an end the message Scanning and calibrating will disappear j The message Is a result made to reflect will appear Press the YES button To correct variations in image density by performing automatic calibration for each paper type refer to 3 2 To Maintain a Steady Color Balance on Thick Paper or Special Paper After performing automatic calibration print and check the image quality If further image quality adjustments are still necessary use the next procedure e STUDIO5520C 6520C 6530C 2008 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved 1 2 1 General Adjustments Copying Printing and e Filing Output from Box BE 2 Enter adjustment mode 05 Change the values for codes 2934 to 2937 to adjust the transfer 2nd transfer roller bias output Adjust the offset voltage of transfer roller bias so as to increase the density of the image The code to use varies depending on the paper type Adjust the value for 05 code corresponding to the paper type for which you would like to improve the image quality Set the value within a range of 2 to 8 to obtain the highest density of the image Recommended Acceptable Default value value range Paper type 05 code Subcode e Plain paper Thic
265. step of the black logos Color to adjust Original mode 05 code Recommended Subcode value Acceptabl e value range HI D 3 Enter adjustment mode 05 Change the values for codes 7811 7812 or 7816 to adjust the black logos MID 4 Enter adjustment mode 05 Change the values for codes 1794 1795 or 7983 to adjust the density level Default Text Photo 05 1794 K Text 05 1795 Black User custom 05 7983 0 1 2 Set a value larger than 128 0 to 255 Set the value in increments of approximately 10 while checking the copy image until the optimum value is obtained The subcode varies according to the area where the density is adjusted Refer to the table below and set the subcode for the area to be adjusted Subcode Area where the density is adjusted Low density area Medium density area High density area Q Caution after the adjustment The adjustment may possibly cause the highly or deeply colored area such as in a photo to become blurred on the copy Also it may also cause offset failure grained images and degradation in gradation Therefore carefully perform the adjustment while checking the copy image e STUDIO5520C 6520C 6530C 2008 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved 2 51 2 Copier specific Adjustments 2 11 2 To Adjust the Copy Image Quality of a Colored Logo You can start with any of the proced
266. stment The image is printed with a natural brightness Default printing After the adjustment After the adjustment A darker print image is obtained A brighter print image is obtained Q Explanation The brightness of the print image can be easily adjusted by changing the Brightness setting on the printer driver e STUDIO5520C 6520C 6530C 2008 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved 3 24 3 Printer specific Adjustments Q Procedures Both the service technician and the user can perform all adjustments Ml 1 Change the Brightness option on the printer driver Select the desired value for brightness on a scale of 4 Darkest to 4 Lightest For Windows PcLe Ps3 _ Open the property page of the printer driver Press the Setting button in the Image Quality tab This adjustment will have an effect only on Auto or Color mode printing Change the Brightness option in the Image Attribute tab Setting Basic Color Balance Image Attribute Contrast m a Brightness on f 4 Background Adjustment a mmi 51 hh xl Saturation 4 er Br V Use Sharpness Filter 4 f Restore Defaults e STUDIO5520C 6520C 6530C 2008 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved 3 25 3 Printer specific Adjustments For Macintosh Mac This adjustment will have an effect only on full color printing Open the print dialog box Change the Brightness opti
267. stment is necessary go to the next step M 2 Perform color balance adjustment to enhance black Use steps a through d to perform the adjustment a Press the IMAGE button on the Control Panel b Press the COLOR BALANCE button c Press the button to enhance the tint of BLACK Press the DETAIL button The tint of the color can be adjusted according to the density area low medium or high density area d Press the ENTER button After adjusting the tint of black copy and check the copy image quality If further image quality adjustment is necessary even after the tint of black was set to the maximum the service technician must perform the next step e STUDIO5520C 6520C 6530C 2008 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved 2 50 Color mode Original mode 05 code value Recommended 2 Copier specific Adjustments Accepta ble value range Default Full color Auto color Set the value in increments of approximately 1 while checking the copy image until the optimum value is obtained For the User custom mode refer to step 1 in 2 8 To Eliminate Moir Text Photo 05 7811 Text 05 7812 User custom 05 7816 than 4 Set a value larger 0 to 8 After adjusting the level of black headline text copy and check the copy image quality If further image quality adjustment is necessary the service technician must perform the next
268. sumables f you perform only step 5 above changing the setting value of code 08 2548 as an image quality adjustment for a certain color it may cause an extra increase or decrease in the amount of the toner used for this color compared with that for the other colors or it may create a difference in the reproducibility of halftones e STUDIO5520C 6520C 6530C 2008 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved 2 11 2 Copier specific Adjustments 2 2 To Closely Match the Color Balance of the Original Before the adjustment After the adjustment The copy image looks yellowish compared The color balance of the copy image is closely with the original matched with that of the original U Explanation Depending on the color balance of the original the copy image sometimes looks different from the original Perform image quality control automatic calibration color adjustment color balance adjustment or RGB adjustment and the color density adjustment in order to match the color balance of the copy image with that of the original Q Procedures You can start with any of the procedures But it is recommended to perform the procedures in order as listed below You can use one procedure in conjunction with another But if this changes the image quality more than required or loses the effectiveness of the adjustment restore the settings made in the previously used procedure to the original ones Then use other proce
269. system Refer to the table below and select the menu OS Menu 10 2 x Printer Features gt Feature Sets Color settings 4 Sharpness 10 3 x 10 4 x 10 5x Color Settings 2 gt Sharpness Printer TOSHIBA e STUDIO6530C HJ Q Presets Standard E Color Settings 2 Color Balance Cyan 0 Magenta 0 i i I r i r I Yellow 0 Black 0 Image Attribute Sharpness Brightness 0 Saturation 0 C PDF v C Preview Cancel E Print Q Caution after the adjustment The adjustment provides a soft or blurred image in general Therefore carefully perform the adjustment while checking the printouts Especially text and lines on the background of a gradational image and text in the Format AutoShape dialog box with transparency selected on Microsoft Office may be blurred e STUDIO5520C 6520C 6530C 2008 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved 3 42 3 Printer specific Adjustments 3 13 To Eliminate Smudges from Highly Colored Text and Lines To prevent toner scattering around text and lines where a large amount of toner is used Before the adjustment After the adjustment Let s Gardening Let s Gardening There s something about gardens and sudnt Qut v med tor tha oed Gardening egent sets Who B noi ntm n serre Frw ratie reveal very 0 we me Sower biomscming n fe spring after CO Qu mintar Garcening is not notan Mm
270. t and check the print image quality Prine If further image quality adjustments are still necessary the service technician must use the next procedure according to the image quality problem the user has To obtain a shaper or softer print image To make only the light colored area darker e STUDIO5520C 6520C 6530C Go to procedure 2 Go to procedure 3 2008 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved 3 99 3 Printer specific Adjustments UI 2 Change the Color balance option on the printer driver For Windows PcLe PS3 _ Open the property page of the printer driver Press the Setting button in the Image Quality tab Change _ This adjustment will have an effect only on Auto or Color mode printing the option in the Color Balance tab Set the value while checking the printouts until the optimum value is obtained Color Balance tab Change the All Colors or Each Color option To make detailed setting you can set it by marking Detail checkbox Same as Auto color or Full color mode Setting Basic Color Balance Image Attribute All Colors Each Color Restore Defaults Cancel Help e STUDIO5520C 6520C 6530C 2008 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved 3 100 3 Printer specific Adjustments 3 Enter adjustment mode 05 Change the values for codes 8042 to 8065 to adjust the color density Adjust the value for 05 code correspond
271. t of the colors copy and check the copy image quality If further image quality adjustments are still necessary use the next procedure Press the BASIC button on the Control Panel Select TEXT from among the original mode options To have TEXT selected from among the original mode options by default refer to procedure 1 in 2 8 To Eliminate Moir After selecting the Text or Map mode copy and check the copy image quality If further image quality adjustments are still necessary the service technician must use the next procedure e STUDIO5520C 6520C 6530C 2008 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved 2 52 2 Copier specific Adjustments Ml 4 Enter adjustment mode 05 Change the values for codes 1779 1780 1784 1785 1789 1790 1794 1795 or 7980 to 7983 to adjust the density level of each color Recommended value Color to adjust Default Original mode 05 code Subcode Text Photo 05 1779 0 1 2 Text 05 1780 0 1 2 User custom 05 7980 0 1 2 Text Photo 05 1784 0 1 2 Text 05 1785 0 1 2 User custom 05 7981 0 1 2 Set a value larger than C Text Photo 05 1789 0 1 2 128 Cyan Text 05 1790 User custom 05 7982 0 1 2 K Text Photo 05 1794 0 1 2 Black Text 05 1795 User custom 05 7983 0 1 2 Y Yellow M Magenta Set the value in increments of approximately 10 while checking the copy image until the o
272. t or RGB adjustment to adjust the tint of colors in general Use steps a through d to perform the adjustment a Press the IMAGE button on the Control Panel b Press the COLOR BALANCE button to adjust the color balance by changing the amount of toner C M Y and K or the RGB ADJUSTMENT button to adjust the color balance by changing the intensity of R G and B c Press the button to enhance the tint of the color or the button to decrease it After selecting the color balance by changing the amount of toner C M Y and K press the DETAIL button The tint of the color can be adjusted according to density area low medium or high density area d Press the ENTER button After adjusting the tint of the colors copy and check the copy image quality If further image quality adjustments are still necessary use the next procedure M W 4 Enter adjustment mode 05 Change the values for codes 1779 to 1798 to adjust the color density Color to Acceptable adjust value range Original mode 05 code Subcode Recommended value Text Photo 05 1779 0 1 2 Text 05 1780 0 1 2 Printed image 05 1781 0 1 2 Photo 05 1782 0 1 2 Map 05 1783 0 1 2 Text Photo 05 1784 0 1 2 Text 05 1785 0 1 2 M Printed 1 05 1786 0 1 2 Magenta E oS 05 1787 0 12 Set a value larger than 128 Map 05 1788 0 1 2 to increase the density Text Photo 05 1789 0 1 2 Text 05 1790 0 1 2 Printed image 05 1791 0 1 2 Photo 05 1792 0 1 2
273. ted Color and Image Quality Type options as described in the table below Color and Image Quality Type options Auto Color Photograph Apply to General Presentation Line Art Black and White Twin Color Text Detail Detail Detail Detail Detail Detail Illustration line etc Graphic Smooth Smooth Smooth Detail Smooth Smooth Image Smooth Smooth Smooth Detail Smooth Smooth Photograph etc The subcode varies according to the area where the density is adjusted Refer to the table below and set the subcode for the area to be adjusted Subcode Area where the density is adjusted Low density area Medium density area High density area Note This adjustment changes the values set in the MFP Therefore it will affect every user who uses the printer by connecting it to the MFP After the adjustment the values changed will be applied to all printouts for the Image Quality Type and Halftone options For instance if the value for 05 code for PCL6 and Smooth is changed it will be applied to printing performed with PCL6 and Halftone Smooth or Auto selected Carefully perform the adjustment being aware that the image quality of all future printouts will be changed when printing out originals other than the one that is used for the adjustment e STUDIO5520C 6520C 6530C 2008 TOSHIBA TEC
274. ter After setting the value use the next procedure Pcie Pss EED Wl 2 Perform automatic calibration to correct variations in image density ADMIN is selected from among the CALIBRATION DISPLAY LEVEL options by default In other words an administrator is authorized to operate the automatic calibration But the USER option can also be selected to allow the user to operate it Refer to the User Functions Guide for further information regarding how to select the CALIBRATION DISPLAY LEVEL option Perform each adjustment for 600dpi and 1200dpi Use steps a through 1 to perform the automatic calibration a Press the USER FUNCTIONS button on the Control Panel to enter the User Functions menu b Press the ADMIN tab c Enter an administrator password of 6 to 10 digits Press the ENTER button d Press the GENERAL button e Press the CALIBRATION button f Press the 600dpi PRINT or 1200dpi PRINT button g Press the button for the paper type to be corrected lt j USER FUNCTIONS CALIBRATION gt Select Paper Type PLAIN 1 PLAIN 2 RECYCLED 64 80g m 81 105g m PAPER SPECIAL 2 THICK 1 THICK 2 THICK 3 THICK 4 106 1639 m 164 2099 m 210 2860 maf 57 3009 me SPECIAL CANCEL After the paper type is selected image quality control is automatically performed h Load A4 LT sized paper selected at step g 1 Press the CALIBRATION butto
275. th 05 8060 0 1 Detail 05 8064 0 1 PS3 Smooth 05 8052 0 1 600dpi Detail 05 8056 0 1 PS3 Smooth 05 8270 0 1 1200dpi Detail 05 8274 0 1 Smooth 05 8044 0 1 As Detail 05 8048 0 1 Smooth 05 8061 0 1 Detail 05 8065 0 1 PS3 Smooth 05 8053 0 1 K 600dpi Detail 05 8057 0 1 Black PS3 Smooth 05 8271 O 1 1200dpi Detail 05 8275 0 1 Smooth 05 8045 0 1 A Detail 05 8049 0 1 PCL5c PCL5c Set a value larger than 128 PCL5c PCL5c Set the value in increments of approximately 20 while checking the printouts until the optimum value is obtained e STUDIO5520C 6520C 6530C 2008 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved 3 63 3 Printer specific Adjustments Halftone refers to how halftones are printed Two options are available Smooth which is intended to improve the reproducibility of gradation and Detail which is intended to print halftones in details with the high frequency The halftone option to be applied in printing can be selected from among the Halftone options on the printer driver Windows or in the print dialog box Macintosh Auto 1s selected from among the Apply to options by default It is intended to automatically select Smooth or Detail in accordance with Apply to of the halftone option the selec
276. than 128 129 to 228 0 to 255 ACS Black Text Photo 05 1757 Text 05 7807 Photo 05 7808 Set a value larger than 128 129 to 228 0 to 255 The smaller the setting value 1s the weaker the sharpness intensity becomes The larger the setting value is the stronger the sharpness intensity becomes Changing the values for these codes will change the sharpness intensity when the Sharpness indicator in the IMAGE menu is set to the center Remember that 1 step of the indicator will increase or decrease the p sharpness intensity by 25 If the sharpness intensity of the center value is changed each step of the indicator will be changed accordingly For instance if the center value is increased by 25 sharper the value of each step of the indicator will also be increased by 25 sharper However the range of adjustment values that is valid for sharpness level change is from 100 to 100 of the total of the setting value of the adjustment code and that of the indicator For instance if the setting value of the adjustment code is 153 25 from the default value the limit of the steps in the sharp side of the indicator is 3 If the step is set at 4 the image quality will not be changed Default Setting value 153 75 so Soft 100 75 50 25 25 0 1 2 3 4 Sharp
277. the Clear option copy and check the copy image quality When the copy image quality with the Clear option selected is insufficient cancel the Clear option and use the next procedure The one touch adjustment can be canceled by pressing the ONE TOUCH ADJUSTMENT button again MID 2 Press the IMAGE button on the Control Panel Press the SHARPNESS button Press the SHARP button to increase the sharpness intensity After increasing the sharpness intensity copy and check the copy image quality If further image quality adjustment is necessary go to the next step e STUDIO5520C 6520C 6530C 2008 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved 2 41 2 Copier specific Adjustments Wn 3 Enter adjustment mode 05 Change the values for codes 604 to 606 922 1737 to 1741 1757 7795 and 7807 to 7809 to adjust the default value for the sharpness intensity ncreasing the sharpness intensity will enhance the edges of the image Color mode Original mode 05 code Recommended value Accepta ble value range Default Text Photo 05 604 Text 05 605 Photo 05 606 User custom 05 922 Image smoothing 05 7809 Set a value larger than 128 129 to 228 0 to 255 Full color Text Photo 05 1737 Text 05 1738 Printed image 05 1739 Photo 05 1740 Map 05 1741 User custom 05 7795 Set a value larger
278. the code 508 to enable the functions of the custom mode in the black mode Value for 08 508 Custom mode for black mode 0 Unused 1 Used Text Photo base The default adjustment value for the custom mode is preset at the one that reproduces image quality equivalent to that of the Text Photo mode in the black mode at the shipment After setting the value go to the next step e STUDIO5520C 6520C 6530C 2008 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved 2 73 2 Copier specific Adjustments E 2 Enter the adjustment mode 05 Adjust each setting value for the custom mode to satisfy the user s request Select the necessary adjustments from the procedures below To match the density level of background scanned with the original glass equivalent to that of background scanned with the RADF a Enter the adjustment mode 05 Change the value for the code 7025 to adjust the reproducibility of the background of the image scanned with the RADF The larger the setting value is the darker the background becomes The smaller the setting value is the lighter the background becomes Acceptable 05 code Recommended value range Default value Set a value smaller than 128 to make the background darker 05 7025 0 to 255 Set a value larger than 128 to make the background lighter To copy while eliminating the background color to adjust the reference value for the background density adjustment Th
279. the image quality more than required or loses the effectiveness of the adjustment restore the settings made in the previously used procedure to the original ones Then use other procedures Both the service technician and the user can use procedures 1 and 2 Only the service technician must use procedures 3 to 5 e STUDIO5520C 6520C 6530C 2008 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved 2 44 I 1 II 2 2 Copier specific Adjustments Press the BASIC button on the Control Panel and select the original mode option as follows To copy in the Full color or the Auto color mode Select the Printed image mode option To copy in the Black mode Select the Photo mode option When copying a photo image in the Full color mode select the Photo mode option from among the original mode options To have the above original mode options selected by default refer to procedure 1 in 2 8 To Eliminate Moir After changing the default original mode option copy and check the copy image quality If further image quality adjustments are still necessary use the next procedure Press the IMAGE button on the Control Panel Press the SHARPNESS button Press the SOFT button to soften the copy image After softening the copy image copy and check the copy image quality If further image quality adjustment is necessary go to the next step Ul I 3 Enter adjustment mode 05 Change the
280. the printed test chart on the original glass 1 Press the START button to perform calibration When the calibration comes to an end the message Scanning and calibrating will disappear As a result of the above steps the copy image quality will be corrected in the Full color mode and the Black and White mode simultaneously After performing automatic calibration copy and check the copy image quality If further image quality adjustments are still necessary use the next procedure MP 2 Perform hue adjustment to adjust the tint of the color in the color area to change Use steps a through d to perform the adjustment a Press the IMAGE button on the Control Panel b Press HUE button c Press the or button on the indicator of the color to adjust Pressing the or button on the indicator changes the hue as shown below For instance press the button at R Red Then the tint of R Red is closely matched with that of Y Yellow Press the button at R Red Then the tint of R Red will be closely matched with that of M Magenta R 2 L d Enter the ENTER button After adjusting the hue copy and check the copy image quality If further image quality adjustments are still necessary use the next procedure e STUDIO5520C 6520C 6530C 2008 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved 2 13 2 Copier specific Adjustments UIN 3 Perform color balance adjustmen
281. timized for printing on paper But while it is being downloaded to a client PC using the File Downloader or the TWAIN driver it is converted into RGB data or optimized for displaying on the computer monitor Depending on the type of original this CMYK to RGB conversion may cause out of registration colors or graininess on the printout If the image is displayed on the monitor and further edited on the PC the image quality may be diminished To store a full color original and display it on the computer monitor while minimizing image degradation scan and store it in the e Filing box Scan to Box This allows it to be stored as RGB data Please remember that the e Filing functions are available only on the Windows platform and not on the Macintosh or UNIX platform Q Procedures Both the service technician and the user can perform all adjustments Scan to Box This adjustment will have an effect only on the image stored in the Full color mode including the Auto color mode M 1 Scan the full color image and store it in the e Filing box For further information regarding how to scan and store images refer to the Operator s Manual for e Filing Guide and Scanning Guide Q Caution after the adjustment Nothing in particular e STUDIO5520C 6520C 6530C 2008 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved 4 14 4 e Filing specific Adjustments 4 8 To Finely Print Color Images Scanned and Stored To print images stored thro
282. tion The menu to select varies according to the operating system Refer to the table below and select the menu OS Menu 10 2 x Printer Features gt Printing Modes gt Do not Print Blank Pages 10 3 x 10 4 x 10 5x Print Mode gt Do not Print Blank Pages Printer TOSHIBA e STUDIO6530C ww o Presets Standard m Print Mode HJ Normal Hi 00000 Department Code Disabled H4 00000 Do not Print Blank Pages Enabled FH EPDE T C Preview Cancel Q Caution after the adjustment The adjustment may not possibly operate the following options as programmed Therefore pay special attention to the combination of options Booklet printing N up printing Use Front Cover Use Back Cover nterleave Pages Q Remarks If any data are inserted in the header or footer of a particular page on Excel or Word even though no data are present in the body the page will not be recognized as a blank page The header or footer will be printed out e STUDIO5520C 6520C 6530C 2008 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved 3 81 3 Printer specific Adjustments 3 21 To Sharply Print Black Text Before the adjustment After the adjustment Emergency Preparedness Things to have for Things to have for an et jer x an et Text looks black on the monitor But the hue The hue of the text is nearly matched with the will vary if it is printed out
283. tion Five original modes Text Photo Text Printed image Photo and Map are available for the color modes and four original modes Text Photo Text Photo and Image smoothing are available for the black mode by default However a new original mode adjusted to be able to satisfy the user s particular requests about image quality can be added as a custom mode One custom mode can be added for each of the color and black modes For users who frequently use the special type of originals or who are not satisfied with the image quality of the existing original modes it is recommended to register a set of copy settings that satisfy the user s particular requests as the custom mode The custom mode is made by adjusting image quality based on the Text Photo mode according to originals to be used It is also available to use the custom mode as an independent original mode This means that the change of the setting values in the custom mode does not affect each default original modes Q Procedures The adjustment procedure differs depending on whether in the black mode or the full color mode the settings in the custom mode are adjusted Ask the user which mode he or she uses and then refer to the procedure that is more suitable for his or her request 2 18 1 To Adjust Custom Mode Settings in Black Mode All the steps in the adjustment procedure shall be performed by the service technician 1 Enter the setting mode 08 Change the value for
284. tions as described by the table below Color and Image Quality Type options Apply to Auto Color General Photograph Presentation Line Art Black and White Twin Color Text Detail Detail Detail Detail Detail Detail Graphic Smooth Smooth Smooth Detail Smooth Smooth Illustration line etc Image Photograph etc Smooth Smooth Smooth Detail Smooth Smooth The subcode varies according to the area where the density is adjusted Refer to the table below and set the subcode for the area to be adjusted Subcode Area where the density is adjusted Low density area Medium density area High density area Note This adjustment changes the values set in the MFP Therefore it will affect every user who uses the printer by connecting it to the MFP After the adjustment the values changed will be applied to all printouts for the Image Quality Type and Halftone options For instance if the value for 05 code for PCL6 and Smooth is changed it will be applied to printing performed with PCL6 and Halftone Smooth or Auto selected Carefully perform the adjustment being aware that the image quality of all future printouts will be changed when printing out originals other than the one that is used for the adjustment This code is commonly used in the Twin color mode and the Color mode After the adjustment the val
285. tment Our Top Five Romantic Destinations Our Top Five Romantic Destinations Whether you re shopping for your perfect honeymoon destination or just looking for a Whether you re shopping for your perfect honeymoon destination o just looking for a special getaway our top destination picks for romance offer beauty relaxation and plenty special getaway our top destination picks for romance offer beauty relaxation and plenty of activities for just the two of you Our members chose these five cities as the best of activities for just the two of you Our members chose these five cities as the best San Jose Venice Jamia St Lucia Del Cabo Jamaica St Lucia 5 B B 18 B B Results based on a survey of Tailwind Premier members Results based on survey of libwind Premier members TOSHIBA TOSHIBA The solid filled graph is not highly colored The solid filled graph becomes highly colored enough and sharper Q Explanation Solid filled bold text such as a logo is sometimes not highly colored on the copy Change the original mode option perform copy density adjustment and level adjustment for black headline text in order to make the solid filled image more highly colored This adjustment will have an effect only on copying in the Full color mode Q Procedures The procedure to use varies depending on whether to adjust the copy image quality of a black or colored logo Refer to the procedure corresponding to the u
286. tment may possibly cause an increase of the amount of toner used if the image density is increased or provide faint print images if the image density is decreased Therefore carefully perform the adjustment while checking the printouts e STUDIO5520C 6520C 6530C 2008 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved 3 76 3 Printer specific Adjustments 3 19 To Print Illegible Gray or Colored Text in Black Before the adjustment After the adjustment Example of configuration of a purification system pumped circulation type Gray yellow and cyan text is illegible on the The gray yellow or cyan text is printed in printouts black This makes it more legible on the printouts Q Explanation Text may look illegible on the printout depending on the hues of the background and the text contained in the original particularly when printing an original containing yellow light blue or gray text on a light colored background In addition when a full color original is printed in the Black and White mode the colored text may turn gray on the printout and eventually become illegible In this case change the option on the printer driver in order to reproduce the colored text except the white text in black and make it more legible on the printout This adjustment will have an effect only on printing on a Windows PCL6 or PS3 or XPS emulation printer driver This adjustment cannot be performed on a Macintosh printer driver
287. tored using Scan to File and Scan to E mail e STUDIO5520C 6520C 6530C 2008 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved 4 1 4 e Filing specific Adjustments Q Procedures Both the service technician and the user can perform all adjustments This adjustment will have an effect only on images stored in the Auto color mode Scan to Box 1 This adjustment is effective when you scan an original judged as a black image at the most appropriate density level in the color modes Use steps a to d to adjust the density a Press the USER FUNCTIONS button on the Control Panel to enter the User Functions menu b Press the USER tab c Press the SCAN button d Press Q or P of the B W ADJUSTMENT IN ACS option to adjust the density level for scanning the original judged as a black image in the Auto color mode If the density level is set to the original will be stored with the low density If the density level is set to D the original will be stored with the high density After adjusting the density scan and store the original in the e Filing box Then check the image quality Only if the user s desired image quality is still not obtained after the density has been adjusted use the next procedure Scan to Box This adjustment will have an effect only on images stored in the Auto color mode 2 Select HIGH QUALITY from among the IMAGE QUALITY FOR BLACK options to store the bl
288. ue range mentioned in the procedures Otherwise it may cause a loss in MFP performance including degradation in the image quality and a reduction in the life of the consumables e STUDIO5520C 6520C 6530C 2008 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved 2 17 2 Copier specific Adjustments 2 4 To Copy in Vivid Colors Before the adjustment After the adjustment CEA 7 When a copy is made without any adjustments The copy image is obtained in vivid colors the vividness is insufficient on the copy image Q Explanation When a copy is made without any adjustments the vividness may be insufficient on the copy image Perform saturation adjustment color adjustment color balance adjustment or RGB adjustment and color density adjustment in order to obtain a copy image in vivid colors Q Procedures You can start with any of the procedures other than 5 But it is recommended to perform the procedures in order as listed below You can use one procedure in conjunction with another But if this changes the image quality more than required or loses the effectiveness of the adjustment restore the settings made in the previously used procedure to the original ones Then use other procedures Both the service technician and the user can use procedures 1 to 3 Only the service technician must use procedure 4 Only if the vividness of R Red is still insufficient even after procedures 1 to 4 have been
289. ues changed will be also applied to the image quality in the Color mode When adjusting the image quality in the Twin color mode carefully perform the adjustment being aware that the image quality of all future printouts will be changed when performing printing in the Color mode e STUDIO5520C 6520C 6530C 2008 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved 3 89 3 Printer specific Adjustments Q Caution after the adjustment The adjustment may possibly change the hue of the text and the image such as a photo image on the printout Therefore carefully perform the adjustment while checking the printouts Q Remarks To check the definition of black text When creating a PDF file 100 black may not be defined as follows depending on the application settings 100 black indicates the following values RGB data RGB 0 e CMYK data CMY 095 K 100 As a result text which should be defined as 100 black on the application is not defined as 100 black on the saved PDF file A small percent of color data is defined Eventually all color toners C M Y and K will be used to print it If printing is performed on a PCL6 printer driver print data are captured as RGB data If black text is defined as 100 black CMY 0 K 100 for CMYK data on a PDF file it will not be converted into 100 black RGB 0 for RGB data on Acrobat and it will be printed in colors It is recommended to print CMYK data on a PS3 printer d
290. ugh Scan to Box Before the adjustment After the adjustment Scan to Box Scan to Box RGB data RGB data e Filing box g Stored g Stored e Filing box Ex Printing image mode Presentation Ex Printing image mode Photo Print Print Converted into Converted into print data print data Unless the printing image mode is selected When the printing image mode suitable for the printing may be performed with image stored data is selected the data can be printed processing not suitable for the stored data finely with optimal image processing e STUDIO5520C 6520C 6530C 2008 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved 4 15 4 e Filing specific Adjustments Q Explanation When an image is scanned stored in the e Filing box Scan to Box in the Full color or the Auto color mode and printed as it is without the printing image mode set printing may be performed with image processing not suitable for the image and the user may not obtain the desired image quality To finely print a full color image scanned and stored select the printing image mode General Photograph Presentation Line Art suitable for the image Then printing can be performed with image processing optimal for the image in the same manner as printing on the printer driver Q Procedures Perform the adjustment in accordance with the procedures below Both the service technician and the user can perform all adjustments Sc
291. ull color Gray scale Black and Auto color e STUDIO5520C 6520C 6530C 2008 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved 5 13 5 Scanning specific Adjustments Q Procedures You can start with any of the procedures But it is recommended to perform the procedures in order as listed below You can use one procedure in conjunction with another But if this changes the image quality more than required or loses the effectiveness of the adjustment restore the settings made in the previously used procedure to the original ones Then use other procedures Both the service technician and the user can use procedure 1 Only the service technician must use procedure 2 IB UP 1 When scanning the original press the COMMON SETTING button on the Control Panel Press the button to increase the sharpness intensity After increasing the sharpness intensity scan the original and check the scanned in image quality With the sharpness intensity set to the maximum if further image quality adjustments are still necessary the service technician must use the next procedure IB 2 Enter adjustment mode 05 Change the values for codes 1086 to 1088 and 840 to 843 to adjust the sharpness intensity Acceptable Default value range Color mode Original mode 05 code Recommended value Text Photo 05 840 Black Text 05 841 Photo 05 842 Text 05 1086 Set a value larger than 128 Fu
292. ult 1 Displayed b Press the USER FUNCTIONS button on the Control Panel to enter the User Functions menu c Press the ADMIN tab d Enter an administrator password in 6 to 10 digits Press the ENTER button e Press the GENERAL button f Press the CALIBRATION button g Press the COPY button h Press the CALIBRATION button to print a test chart 1 Place the printed test chart on the original glass j Press the START button to start the calibration The message WAIT disappears when the calibration is finished The procedure above covers both the color and black copy calibration After the automatic calibration copy and check the image quality If further image quality adjustment is necessary go to the next step INI 2 Enter adjustment mode 05 Change the values for codes 1613 to 1620 to adjust the amount of toner used The code to use varies depending on the paper type Adjust the value for 05 code corresponding to the paper type for which you would like to improve the image quality and increase the value to obtain the copy density that the user desires Acceptable Default value range Thick 1 05 1613 255 Thick 2 05 1614 Thick 3 05 1615 OHP 05 1616 Set a value larger than 240 SPECIAL 1 05 1617 SPECIAL 2 05 1618 Thick 4 05 1620 Paper type 05 code Recommended value Set the value in increments of approximately 4 while checking the cop
293. unit and thoroughly clean it if it is soiled Q Caution after the adjustment Nothing in particular Q Remarks Enter the value mentioned in the procedures or one within the recommended value range for the adjustment Otherwise it may cause a loss in MFP performance including degradation in the image quality and a reduction in the life of the consumables f printing on another type of paper causes a problem with the image quality after the adjustment return the set values for codes 05 2934 to 2937 to the default set value 5 and then perform the adjustment again When replacing any consumable refer to the relevant information in the Service Manual and Service Handbook e STUDIO5520C 6520C 6530C O 2008 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION AII rights reserved 1 4 1 General Adjustments Copying Printing and e Filing Output from Box 1 2 To Adjust the Density on a Solid Colored Image If the density is decreased ya la carte menu omg rs The solid colored area becomes lighter Q Explanation If the density is increased ge la carte meny om z The solid colored area becomes darker In thick paper printing the density of a solid colored image can be made darker to enhance it or lighter in order to match with the type or color of the original Notes The function described in this chapter cannot be used for plain paper 1 and 2 in the full color mode The type of
294. ures But it is recommended to perform the procedures in order as listed below You can use one procedure in conjunction with another But if this changes the image quality more than required or loses the effectiveness of the adjustment restore the settings made in the previously used procedure to the original ones Then use other procedures Both the service technician and the user can use procedures 1 to 3 Only the service technician must use procedure 4 I 1 Im 2 Ill 3 Press the BASIC button on the Control Panel Press the D button to increase the copy density After increasing the copy density copy and check the copy image quality With the copy density set to the maximum if further image quality adjustments are still necessary use the next procedure Perform color balance adjustment or RGB adjustment to adjust the tint of the colors in general Use steps a through d to perform the adjustment a Press the IMAGE button on the Control Panel b Press the COLOR BALANCE button to adjust the color balance by changing the amount of toner c Press the button to enhance the tint of the color or the button to decrease it After selecting the color balance by changing the amount of toner C M Y and K press the DETAIL button The tint of the color can be adjusted according to density area low medium or high density area d Press the ENTER button After adjusting the tin
295. used the service technician must use procedure 5 e STUDIO5520C 6520C 6530C 2008 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved 2 18 m 1 MW 2 I 3 2 Copier specific Adjustments Press the IMAGE button on the Control Panel Press the ONE TOUCH ADJUSTMENT button Press the VIVID button After selecting the Vivid option copy and check the copy image quality When the copy image quality with the Vivid option is insufficient cancel the Vivid option and use the next procedure The one touch adjustment can be canceled by pressing the ONE TOUCH ADJUSTMENT button again Perform saturation adjustment to adjust the overall saturation Use steps a through d to perform the adjustment a Press the IMAGE button on the Control Panel b Press the SATURATION button c Press the button to increase the saturation of the copy image d Press the ENTER button After adjusting the saturation copy and check the copy image quality If further image quality adjustments are still necessary use the next procedure Perform color balance adjustment or RGB adjustment to adjust the tint of colors in general For further information regarding the adjustment procedures refer to procedure 3 in 2 2 To Closely Match the Color Balance of the Original After adjusting the tint of colors copy and check the copy image quality If further image quality adjustments are still necessary the service technicia
296. ustments are still necessary use the next procedure e STUDIO5520C 6520C 6530C 2008 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved 2 55 2 Copier specific Adjustments II 3 Perform color balance adjustment or RGB adjustment to adjust the tint of the colors in general For further information regarding the adjustment procedures refer to procedure 3 in 2 2 To Closely Match the Color Balance of the Original After adjusting the tint of colors copy and check the copy image quality If further image quality adjustments are still necessary the service technician must use the next procedure IB P 4 Enter adjustment mode 05 Change the values for codes 1779 to 1798 and 7980 to 7983 to adjust the density level of each color Color to adjust Acceptable Original mode 05 code Subcode Recommended value value range Text Photo 05 1779 0 1 2 Text 05 1780 0 1 2 Y Printed image 05 1781 0 1 2 Yellow Photo 05 1782 0 1 2 Map 05 1783 0 1 2 User custom 05 7980 0 1 2 Text Photo 05 1784 0 1 2 Text 05 1785 0 1 2 M Printed image 05 1786 0 1 2 Magenta Photo 05 1787 0 1 2 Map 05 1788 0 1 2 Set a value larger than 128 User custom 05 7981 0 1 2 increase the density Text Photo 05 1789 0 1 2 Text 05 1790 0 1 2 Printed image 05 1791 0 1 2 Photo 05 1792 0 1 2 Map 05 1793 0 1 2 User custom 05 7982 0 1 2 Text Photo 05 1794 0 1 2 Text 05 1795 0 1 2 K Printed image 05 1796 0 1 2 Black Photo 05 1797 0 1 2 Ma
297. utton d In the ORIGINAL MODE FOR COLOR or BLACK option press the button corresponding to the desired original mode option To change the default original mode in setting mode 08 Enter setting mode 08 Change the value for code 550 or 585 to change the original mode option which is selected by default at power on In the Black mode Value for 08 550 Default original mode at power on Text Photo default Text Photo Image smoothing Custom n the Full color mode Value for 08 585 Default original mode at power on 0 Text Photo default Text Printed image Photo Map Custom Press the BASIC button on the Control Panel Select Custom from among the original mode options in the Black or the Full color mode If the CUSTOM button is not displayed in the original mode option change the values for the following codes to enable the Custom mode option In the Black mode Enter setting mode 08 Set 1 for code 508 In the Full color mode Enter setting mode 08 Set 1 for code 506 After changing the default original mode option copy and check the copy image quality If further image quality adjustments are still necessary use the next procedure e STUDIO5520C 6520C 6530C 2008 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved 2 38 Press the SOFT button to soften the copy image After softening the copy image copy and check the copy image
298. value smaller than 128 to decrease the density obtained The value for the code corresponding to the original mode Text Photo Text or Printed image will affect the copy image quality in the Full color mode and the Auto color mode The subcode varies according to the area where the density is adjusted Refer to the table below and set the subcode for the area to be adjusted The density of the highlighted area will vary if the low or medium density area is mainly adjusted Setting 2 for subcode allows you to adjust the high density area But it will not affect the highlighted area Therefore never change the value for the high density area Subcode Area where the density is adjusted 0 Low density area 1 Medium density area Q Caution after the adjustment The adjustment may possibly provide an excessively dark background Therefore carefully perform the adjustment while checking the copy image Remarks Enter a value within the recommended value range mentioned in the procedures Otherwise it may cause a loss in MFP performance including degradation in the image quality and a reduction in the life of the consumables e STUDIO5520C 6520C 6530C 2008 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved 2 24 2 Copier specific Adjustments 2 6 To Eliminate the Background Color Before the adjustment After the adjustment _ TOSHIBA COPIER DEMONSTRATION CHAR
299. values for codes 604 to 606 922 1737 to 1741 1757 7795 and 7807 to 7809 to adjust the default value for the sharpness intensity Decreasing the sharpness intensity will minimize the edges of the image Recommended Accepta Color mode Original mode 05 code Value ble value Default range Text Photo 05 604 Text 05 605 Set a value smaller Photo 05 606 than 128 0 to 255 User custom 05 922 28 to 127 Image smoothing 05 7809 Text Photo 05 1737 Text 05 1738 Printed image 05 1739 Photo 05 1740 Map 05 1741 User custom 05 7795 Text Photo 05 1757 Set a value smaller ACS Black Text 05 7807 than 128 Photo 05 7808 28 to 127 Set a value smaller than 128 0 to 255 28 to 127 Full color e STUDIO5520C 6520C 6530C 2008 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved 2 Copier specific Adjustments The smaller the setting value is the weaker the sharpness intensity becomes The larger the setting value is the stronger the sharpness intensity becomes Changing the values for these codes will change the sharpness intensity when the Sharpness indicator in the IMAGE menu is set to the center Remember that 1 step of the indicator will increase or decrease the sharpness intensity by 25 If the sharpness intensity of the center value is changed each step of the indicator will be changed accordingly For instance if the ce
300. ver Change the Image Quality Type option in the Image Quality tab amp TOSHIBA e STUDIO6530CSeries PS3 Printing Preferences Basic Finishing Paper Handling Image Quality Effect Others Print Job Normal Print z El Image Quality Type E x EHE f Profile Name d General La Photograph E Presentation e E Line Art bl Advanced E LS Graphics Text E iea None Save Profile Delete Setting Restore Defaults e STUDIO5520C 6520C 6530C 2008 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved 3 7 3 Printer specific Adjustments For Macintosh Mac This adjustment will have an effect only on full color printing Open the print dialog box Change the Image Type option The menu to select varies according to the operating system Refer to the table below and select the menu OS Menu 10 2 x Printer Features gt Feature Sets Color settings 2 gt Image Type 10 3 x 10 4 x 10 5x Color Settings 1 gt Image Type Printer TOSHIBA e STUDIO6S 30C we Presets Standard HH Color Settings 1 HH Color Type Color HH Resolution f 600 dpi H4 Halftone Auto Hd M Distinguish Thin Lines Toner Save De rere EE 1LLtLEGC re 1 ILLO Image Type V General Photo Black Over Print Presentation Pure Black and Gray PDFY 3 Preview
301. wing flowchart This flowchart is common for the Full color and Black modes Start Offsetting correction of contrast potential has been set 0 No automatic 1 Automatic calibration calibration for each for each paper type Value for 08 9059 paper type Set 1 for code 08 9059 Perform automatic calibration e STUDIO5520C 6520C 6530C 2008 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved 1 7 1 General Adjustments Copying Printing and e Filing Output from Box Hint Automatic calibration In paper types whose density has been adjusted automatic calibration is performed for all MFP modes in the following table However automatic calibration for each paper type can be performed separately by changing the value of 08 9059 from 0 default to Automatic calibration only for paper types whose density has been adjusted can also be performed however it is recommended to perform it for other paper types as well MFP mode How to perform automatic calibration Perform step 1 referring to 2 13 To Obtain a Good Color Balance on Thick Paper Perform step 2 and later if required Copy Print 600dpi Perform step 2 referring to 3 2 To Maintain a Steady Color Balance on Print Thick Paper or Special Paper 1200dpi After automatic calibration perform printing and check the image quality If further image quality adjustments are necessary perform the next step M W 3
302. ximately 10 while checking the printouts until the optimum value is obtained e STUDIO5520C 6520C 6530C 2008 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved 3 75 3 Printer specific Adjustments To adjust the image quality on Black and White printing Black and White is selected from among the Color options on the PCL6 or PS3 or XPS printer driver Mono is selected from among the Color Type options on Macintosh The Color options are available in the Basic tab on the PCL6 PS3 and XPS printer drivers The Color Type options are available in the Color Settings 1 menu in the print dialog box on Macintosh a Enter adjustment mode 05 Increase the value for codes 664 or 7302 to adjustment the upper limit of the image density in the toner save mode Printing on Macintosh is performed in PostScript See the PS3 row in the table below Recommended Acceptable Default value value range Resolution 05 code Subcode Set a value smaller than 176 to decrease the density 05 664 05 664 Set a value larger 05 664 than 176 to increase the density Set a value smaller than 176 to decrease the density 05 7302 1200dpi 05 7302 Set a value larger 05 7302 than 176 to increase the density Set the value in increments of approximately 10 while checking the printouts until the optimum value is obtained Q Caution after the adjustment The adjus
303. y image until the optimum value is obtained e STUDIO5520C 6520C 6530C 2008 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved 2 58 2 Copier specific Adjustments The table below shows you the acceptable paper weight for the paper type Paper type Acceptable paper weight Thick 1 106 to 163 g m Max 60 Ib Cover Thick 2 164 to 209 g m Max 110 Ib Index Thick 3 210 to 256 g n Max 140 Ib Index Thick 4 257 to 300 g n Max 110 Ib Cover Use the recommended OHP transparencies and special paper After adjusting the amount of toner used copy and check the copy image quality If further image quality adjustments are still necessary the service technician must use the next procedure IB W 3 Perform color balance adjustment or RGB adjustment to adjust the tint of the colors in general For further information regarding the adjustment procedures refer to procedure 3 in 2 2 To Closely Match the Color Balance of the Original After adjusting the tint of colors copy and check the copy image quality If further image quality adjustments are still necessary use the next procedure UE 4 Enter adjustment mode 05 Change the values for codes 1779 to 1798 and 7980 to 7983 to adjust the density level of each color Color to adjust Original mode 05 code Subcode Recommended value OSEE ID value range Text Photo 05 1779 0 1 2 Text 05 1780 0 1 2 Y Printed image 05 1781 0 1 2 Yellow Phot
304. y in the Full color mode and the Auto color mode The value adjusted for the background density is shared in the Full color mode with the Printed image mode selected and in the Black mode with the Photo mode selected Therefore adjusting the copy image quality in either of the modes affects that in the other mode Perform copy image quality adjustment in the mode that is used for the adjustment while checking that in the other mode n the manual density adjustment images are processed with the highlighting reproducibility given priority Therefore it is recommended to select the automatic density adjustment in order to make the background lighter e STUDIO5520C 6520C 6530C 2008 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved 2 28 2 Copier specific Adjustments Note Making the highlighted area more visible or increasing the background density and eliminating the background color or decreasing the background density are mutually contradictory If the density of the background color is decreased the highlighted area may become less visible After adjusting the background density copy and check the copy image quality If further image quality adjustments are still necessary or background elimination is necessary according to color use the next procedure Mi W 4 Enter adjustment mode 05 Change the values for codes 1779 to 1798 to adjust the color density ike Original mode 05 code Subcode Recommended value EN
305. ype any type of paper Q Explanation The color balance varies according to a change in the environment replacement of the consumables and so forth The amount of the change varies significantly according to the paper type Periodically adjust the color reproducibility automatic calibration corresponding to the paper type in order to constantly maintain a steady color balance on any type of paper Automatic calibration 1s the basic adjustment to accurately reproduce colors on the printouts When you would like to accurately reproduce the desired hue or when you have replaced the consumables and changed the operating conditions perform automatic calibration to ensure the color reproducibility Q Procedures Perform the adjustment in accordance with the procedures below Only the service technician must use procedure 1 Both the service technician and the user can use procedure 2 e STUDIO5520C 6520C 6530C O 2008 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved 3 4 3 Printer specific Adjustments PcLe C PS3 xPs PEEB E 1 Enter setting mode 08 Set 1 for code 9059 During automatic calibration the paper type can be selected and image quality control will be automatically performed Operation switching at calibration PRIME uer uon ne displaying of a paper selection menu during automatic calibration No paper selecting buttons display Paper selecting buttons displayed For both Copy and Prin

Toshiba 5520c All in One Printer User Manual

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents